///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
///
/**
* Type Definitions for Gjs (https://gjs.guide/)
*
* These type definitions are automatically generated, do not edit them by hand.
* If you found a bug fix it in `ts-for-gir` or create a bug report on https://github.com/gjsify/ts-for-gir
*
* The based EJS template file is used for the generated .d.ts file of each GIR module like Gtk-4.0, GObject-2.0, ...
*/
declare module 'gi://GcrUi?version=3' {
// Module dependencies
import type Gtk from 'gi://Gtk?version=3.0';
import type xlib from 'gi://xlib?version=2.0';
import type Gdk from 'gi://Gdk?version=3.0';
import type cairo from 'cairo';
import type GObject from 'gi://GObject?version=2.0';
import type GLib from 'gi://GLib?version=2.0';
import type Pango from 'gi://Pango?version=1.0';
import type HarfBuzz from 'gi://HarfBuzz?version=0.0';
import type freetype2 from 'gi://freetype2?version=2.0';
import type Gio from 'gi://Gio?version=2.0';
import type GModule from 'gi://GModule?version=2.0';
import type GdkPixbuf from 'gi://GdkPixbuf?version=2.0';
import type Atk from 'gi://Atk?version=1.0';
import type Gcr from 'gi://Gcr?version=3';
import type Gck from 'gi://Gck?version=1';
export namespace GcrUi {
/**
* GcrUi-3
*/
/**
* If a [class`CollectionModel]` is created with a mode of
* %GCR_COLLECTION_MODEL_TREE, then any included objects that are themselves a
* [iface`Gcr`.Collection], will have all child
* objects include as child rows in a tree form.
*/
/**
* If a [class`CollectionModel]` is created with a mode of
* %GCR_COLLECTION_MODEL_TREE, then any included objects that are themselves a
* [iface`Gcr`.Collection], will have all child
* objects include as child rows in a tree form.
*/
export namespace CollectionModelMode {
export const $gtype: GObject.GType;
}
enum CollectionModelMode {
/**
* only objects in the top collection, no child objects
*/
LIST,
/**
* show objects in the collection, and child objects in a tree form
*/
TREE,
}
/**
* Create and initialize a renderer for the given attributes and label. These
* renderers should have been preregistered via gcr_renderer_register().
* @param label The label for the renderer
* @param attrs The attributes to render
* @returns a new renderer, or %NULL if no renderer matched the attributes; the render should be released with g_object_unref()
*/
function renderer_create(label: string | null, attrs: Gck.Attributes): Renderer | null;
/**
* Register a renderer to be created when matching attributes are passed to
* gcr_renderer_create().
* @param renderer_type The renderer class type
* @param attrs The attributes to match
*/
function renderer_register(renderer_type: GObject.GType, attrs: Gck.Attributes): void;
/**
* Register all the well known renderers for certificates and keys known to the
* Gcr library.
*/
function renderer_register_well_known(): void;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a view
* of multiple renderers.
* @returns a newly allocated #GcrViewer, which should be released with g_object_unref()
*/
function viewer_new(): Viewer;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a scrolled view
* of multiple renderers.
* @returns a #GcrViewer which is also a #GtkWidget
*/
function viewer_new_scrolled(): Viewer;
namespace CertificateRenderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps,
Gcr.Certificate.ConstructorProps,
Gcr.Comparable.ConstructorProps,
Renderer.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
certificate: Gcr.Certificate;
label: string;
}
}
/**
* An implementation of #GcrRenderer which renders certificates.
*/
class CertificateRenderer extends GObject.Object implements Gcr.Certificate, Gcr.Comparable, Renderer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
/**
* The certificate attributes to display. One of the attributes must be
* a CKA_VALUE type attribute which contains a DER encoded certificate.
*/
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
/**
* The certificate to display. May be %NULL.
*/
get certificate(): Gcr.Certificate;
set certificate(val: Gcr.Certificate);
/**
* The label to display.
*/
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](certificate: Gcr.Certificate): CertificateRenderer;
static new_for_attributes(label?: string | null, attrs?: any | null): CertificateRenderer;
// Methods
/**
* Get the certificate displayed in the renderer. If no certificate was
* explicitly set, then the renderer will return itself since it acts as
* a valid certificate.
* @returns The certificate, owned by the renderer.
*/
get_certificate(): Gcr.Certificate;
/**
* Set a certificate to display in the renderer.
* @param certificate the certificate to display
*/
set_certificate(certificate?: Gcr.Certificate | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* A readable description for this certificate
*/
get description(): string;
/**
* The expiry date of the certificate
*/
get expiry(): GLib.Date;
/**
* An icon representing the certificate
*/
get icon(): Gio.Icon;
/**
* Common name part of the certificate issuer
*/
get issuer(): string;
/**
* GLib markup to describe the certificate
*/
get markup(): string;
/**
* Common name part of the certificate subject
*/
get subject(): string;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Get the basic constraints for the certificate if present. If %FALSE is
* returned then no basic constraints are present and the `is_ca` and
* `path_len` arguments are not changed.
* @returns whether basic constraints are present or not
*/
get_basic_constraints(): [boolean, boolean, number];
/**
* Gets the raw DER data for an X.509 certificate.
* @returns raw DER data of the X.509 certificate
*/
get_der_data(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Get the expiry date of this certificate.
*
* The #GDate returned should be freed by the caller using
* g_date_free() when no longer required.
* @returns An allocated expiry date of this certificate.
*/
get_expiry_date(): GLib.Date;
/**
* Calculate the fingerprint for this certificate.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @param type the type of algorithm for the fingerprint.
* @returns the raw binary fingerprint
*/
get_fingerprint(type: GLib.ChecksumType | null): Uint8Array;
/**
* Calculate the fingerprint for this certificate, and return it
* as a hex string.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @param type the type of algorithm for the fingerprint.
* @returns an allocated hex string which contains the fingerprint.
*/
get_fingerprint_hex(type: GLib.ChecksumType | null): string;
/**
* Get the issued date of this certificate.
*
* The #GDate returned should be freed by the caller using
* g_date_free() when no longer required.
* @returns An allocated issued date of this certificate.
*/
get_issued_date(): GLib.Date;
/**
* Get the common name of the issuer of this certificate.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated issuer CN, or %NULL if no issuer CN present.
*/
get_issuer_cn(): string;
/**
* Get the full issuer DN of the certificate as a (mostly)
* readable string.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated issuer DN of the certificate.
*/
get_issuer_dn(): string;
/**
* Get a name to represent the issuer of this certificate.
*
* This will try to lookup the common name, orianizational unit,
* organization in that order.
* @returns the allocated issuer name, or %NULL if no issuer name
*/
get_issuer_name(): string;
/**
* Get a part of the DN of the issuer of this certificate.
*
* Examples of a `part` might be the 'OU' (organizational unit)
* or the 'CN' (common name). Only the value of that part
* of the DN is returned.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @param part a DN type string or OID.
* @returns the allocated part of the issuer DN, or %NULL if no such part is present
*/
get_issuer_part(part: string): string | null;
/**
* Get the raw DER data for the issuer DN of the certificate.
*
* The data should be freed by using g_free() when no longer required.
* @returns allocated memory containing the raw issuer
*/
get_issuer_raw(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Get the key size in bits of the public key represented
* by this certificate.
* @returns The key size of the certificate.
*/
get_key_size(): number;
/**
* Calculate a GMarkup string for displaying this certificate.
* @returns the markup string
*/
get_markup_text(): string;
/**
* Get the raw binary serial number of the certificate.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @returns the raw binary serial number.
*/
get_serial_number(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Get the serial number of the certificate as a hex string.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @returns an allocated string containing the serial number as hex.
*/
get_serial_number_hex(): string;
/**
* Get the common name of the subject of this certificate.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated subject CN, or %NULL if no subject CN present.
*/
get_subject_cn(): string;
/**
* Get the full subject DN of the certificate as a (mostly)
* readable string.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated subject DN of the certificate.
*/
get_subject_dn(): string;
/**
* Get a name to represent the subject of this certificate.
*
* This will try to lookup the common name, orianizational unit,
* organization in that order.
* @returns the allocated subject name, or %NULL if no subject name
*/
get_subject_name(): string;
/**
* Get a part of the DN of the subject of this certificate.
*
* Examples of a `part` might be the 'OU' (organizational unit)
* or the 'CN' (common name). Only the value of that part
* of the DN is returned.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @param part a DN type string or OID.
* @returns the allocated part of the subject DN, or %NULL if no such part is present.
*/
get_subject_part(part: string): string | null;
/**
* Get the raw DER data for the subject DN of the certificate.
*
* The data should be freed by using g_free() when no longer required.
* @returns allocated memory containing the raw subject
*/
get_subject_raw(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Check if `issuer` could be the issuer of this certificate. This is done by
* comparing the relevant subject and issuer fields. No signature check is
* done. Proper verification of certificates must be done via a crypto
* library.
* @param issuer a possible issuer #GcrCertificate
* @returns whether @issuer could be the issuer of the certificate.
*/
is_issuer(issuer: Gcr.Certificate): boolean;
/**
* Implementers of the #GcrCertificate mixin should call this function to notify
* when the certificate has changed to emit notifications on the various
* properties.
*/
mixin_emit_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets the raw DER data for an X.509 certificate.
*/
vfunc_get_der_data(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Compare whether two objects represent the same thing. The return value can
* also be used to sort the objects.
* @param other Another comparable object
* @returns Zero if the two objects represent the same thing, non-zero if not.
*/
compare(other?: Gcr.Comparable | null): number;
/**
* Compare whether two objects represent the same thing. The return value can
* also be used to sort the objects.
* @param other Another comparable object
*/
vfunc_compare(other?: Gcr.Comparable | null): number;
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Get the PKCS#11 attributes, if any, set for this renderer to display.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Set the PKCS#11 attributes for this renderer to display.
* @param attrs attributes to set
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace CertificateWidget {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Bin.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
certificate: Gcr.Certificate;
}
}
/**
* A widget that can be used to display a certificate.
*
* A certificate widget is normally in a collapsed state showing only
* details, but can be expanded by the user.
*
* Use [ctor`CertificateWidget`.new] to create a new certificate widget. Only
* one certificate can be displayed. It contains a [iface`Viewer]` internally
* and [class`CertificateRenderer]` is used to render the certificate to the
* viewer.
*
* To show more than one certificate in a view, create the viewer and
* add renderers to it.
*/
class CertificateWidget extends Gtk.Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
get certificate(): Gcr.Certificate;
set certificate(val: Gcr.Certificate);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](certificate?: Gcr.Certificate | null): CertificateWidget;
// Methods
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the widget. The attributes should contain
* a certificate.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the widget
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Get the certificate displayed in the widget.
* @returns the certificate
*/
get_certificate(): Gcr.Certificate | null;
/**
* Set the attributes displayed in the widget. The attributes should contain
* a certificate.
* @param attrs the attributes to display
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
/**
* Set the certificate displayed in the widget
* @param certificate the certificate to display
*/
set_certificate(certificate?: Gcr.Certificate | null): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace CollectionModel {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.TreeModel.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.TreeSortable.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
columns: any;
}
}
/**
* Ain implementation of a [iface`Gtk`.TreeModel] which contains a row for each
* object in a [iface`Gcr`.Collection].
*
* As objects are added or removed from the collection, rows are added and
* removed from this model.
*
* The row values come from the properties of the objects in the collection. Use
* [ctor`CollectionModel`.new] to create a new collection model. To have more
* control over the values use a set of [struct`Gcr`.Column] structures to
* define the columns. This can be done with [ctor`CollectionModel`.new_full] or
* [method`CollectionModel`.set_columns].
*
* Each row can have a selected state, which is represented by a boolean column.
* The selected state can be toggled with gcr_collection_model_toggle_selected()
* or set with gcr_collection_model_set_selected_objects() and retrieved with
* [method`CollectionModel`.get_selected_objects].
*
* To determine which object a row represents and vice versa, use the
* [method`CollectionModel`.iter_for_object] or
* [method`CollectionModel`.object_for_iter] functions.
*/
class CollectionModel extends GObject.Object implements Gtk.TreeModel, Gtk.TreeSortable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
set collection(val: Gcr.Collection);
get columns(): any;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
// Methods
/**
* Set whether a given row is toggled selected or not.
* @param iter The row
* @param selected Whether the row should be selected or not.
*/
change_selected(iter: Gtk.TreeIter, selected: boolean): void;
/**
* Get the column identifier for the column that contains the values
* of the selected state.
* @returns The column identifier.
*/
column_for_selected(): number;
/**
* Get the collection which this model represents
* @returns the collection, owned by the model
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get a list of checked/selected objects.
* @returns a list of selected objects, which should be freed with g_list_free()
*/
get_selected_objects(): GObject.Object[];
/**
* Check whether a given row has been toggled as selected.
* @param iter The row
* @returns Whether the row has been selected.
*/
is_selected(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Set `iter` to the row for the given object. If the object is not in this
* model, then %FALSE will be returned.
* @param object The object
* @param iter The row for the object
* @returns %TRUE if the object was present.
*/
iter_for_object(object: GObject.Object, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Get the object that is represented by the given row in the model.
* @param iter The row
* @returns The object, owned by the model.
*/
object_for_iter(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): T;
/**
* Set the collection which this model represents
* @param collection the collection or %NULL
*/
set_collection(collection?: Gcr.Collection | null): void;
/**
* Set the checked/selected objects.
* @param selected a list of objects to select
*/
set_selected_objects(selected: GObject.Object[]): void;
/**
* Toggle the selected state of a given row.
* @param iter The row
*/
toggle_selected(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with `child_model` as the child_model
* and `root` as the virtual root.
* @param root A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
* @returns A new #GtkTreeModel.
*/
filter_new(root?: Gtk.TreePath | null): Gtk.TreeModel;
/**
* Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
*
* If `func` returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked,
* and gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
* @param func a function to be called on each row
*/
foreach(func: Gtk.TreeModelForeachFunc): void;
/**
* Returns the type of the column.
* @param index_ the column index
* @returns the type of the column
*/
get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;
/**
* Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
*
* The flags are a bitwise combination of #GtkTreeModelFlags.
* The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
* of the `tree_model`.
* @returns the flags supported by this interface
*/
get_flags(): Gtk.TreeModelFlags;
/**
* Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`. If `path` does
* not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* @param path the #GtkTreePath-struct
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter was set
*/
get_iter(path: Gtk.TreePath): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Initializes `iter` with the first iterator in the tree
* (the one at the path "0") and returns %TRUE. Returns
* %FALSE if the tree is empty.
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter was set
*/
get_iter_first(): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path_string,` if it
* exists. Otherwise, `iter` is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
* @param path_string a string representation of a #GtkTreePath-struct
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter was set
*/
get_iter_from_string(path_string: string): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
* @returns the number of columns
*/
get_n_columns(): number;
/**
* Returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct referenced by `iter`.
*
* This path should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct
*/
get_path(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): Gtk.TreePath;
/**
* Generates a string representation of the iter.
*
* This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
* For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
* return value for this string.
* @param iter a #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns a newly-allocated string. Must be freed with g_free().
*/
get_string_from_iter(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): string;
/**
* Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
*
* When done with `value,` g_value_unset() needs to be called
* to free any allocated memory.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @param column the column to lookup the value at
*/
get_value(iter: Gtk.TreeIter, column: number): unknown;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
*
* If `parent` has no children, %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
* function has been called.
*
* If `parent` is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
* `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter has been set to the first child
*/
iter_children(parent?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `iter` has children, %FALSE otherwise.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct to test for children
* @returns %TRUE if @iter has children
*/
iter_has_child(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
*
* As a special case, if `iter` is %NULL, then the number
* of toplevel nodes is returned.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
* @returns the number of children of @iter
*/
iter_n_children(iter?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): number;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
*
* If there is no next `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is set
* to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the next node
*/
iter_next(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent,` using the given index.
*
* The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. `parent`
* will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
* special case, if `parent` is %NULL, then the `n-th` root node
* is set.
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct to get the child from, or %NULL.
* @param n the index of the desired child
* @returns %TRUE, if @parent has an @n-th child
*/
iter_nth_child(parent: Gtk.TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
*
* If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
* called.
*
* `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
* and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
* @param child the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter is set to the parent of @child
*/
iter_parent(child: Gtk.TreeIter): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
*
* If there is no previous `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the previous node
*/
iter_previous(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Lets the tree ref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons.
*
* This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
* caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
* whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
* is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
* visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
* would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
* just the sections that are currently being displayed by
* every current view.
*
* A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
* of its reffed state.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
ref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-changed signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
row_changed(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-deleted signal on `tree_model`.
*
* This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
* The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
* the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
*
* Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
* outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the previous location of the deleted row
*/
row_deleted(path: Gtk.TreePath): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-has-child-toggled signal on
* `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
* state of a node changes.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
row_has_child_toggled(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-inserted signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the inserted row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the inserted row
*/
row_inserted(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::rows-reordered signal on `tree_model`.
*
* This should be called by models when their rows have been
* reordered.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the tree node whose children have been reordered
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the node whose children have been reordered, or %NULL if the depth of @path is 0
* @param new_order an array of integers mapping the current position of each child to its old position before the re-ordering, i.e. @new_order`[newpos] = oldpos`
*/
rows_reordered(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter | null, new_order: number[]): void;
/**
* Lets the tree unref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
* this means, see gtk_tree_model_ref_node().
*
* Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
unref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Returns the type of the column.
* @param index_ the column index
*/
vfunc_get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;
/**
* Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
*
* The flags are a bitwise combination of #GtkTreeModelFlags.
* The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
* of the `tree_model`.
*/
vfunc_get_flags(): Gtk.TreeModelFlags;
/**
* Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`. If `path` does
* not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* @param path the #GtkTreePath-struct
*/
vfunc_get_iter(path: Gtk.TreePath): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
*/
vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;
/**
* Returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct referenced by `iter`.
*
* This path should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_get_path(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): Gtk.TreePath;
/**
* Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
*
* When done with `value,` g_value_unset() needs to be called
* to free any allocated memory.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @param column the column to lookup the value at
*/
vfunc_get_value(iter: Gtk.TreeIter, column: number): unknown;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
*
* If `parent` has no children, %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
* function has been called.
*
* If `parent` is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
* `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_iter_children(parent?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `iter` has children, %FALSE otherwise.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct to test for children
*/
vfunc_iter_has_child(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
*
* As a special case, if `iter` is %NULL, then the number
* of toplevel nodes is returned.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_iter_n_children(iter?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): number;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
*
* If there is no next `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is set
* to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_iter_next(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent,` using the given index.
*
* The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. `parent`
* will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
* special case, if `parent` is %NULL, then the `n-th` root node
* is set.
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct to get the child from, or %NULL.
* @param n the index of the desired child
*/
vfunc_iter_nth_child(parent: Gtk.TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
*
* If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
* called.
*
* `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
* and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
* @param child the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_iter_parent(child: Gtk.TreeIter): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
*
* If there is no previous `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_iter_previous(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Lets the tree ref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons.
*
* This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
* caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
* whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
* is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
* visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
* would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
* just the sections that are currently being displayed by
* every current view.
*
* A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
* of its reffed state.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_ref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-changed signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
vfunc_row_changed(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-deleted signal on `tree_model`.
*
* This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
* The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
* the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
*
* Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
* outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the previous location of the deleted row
*/
vfunc_row_deleted(path: Gtk.TreePath): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-has-child-toggled signal on
* `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
* state of a node changes.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
vfunc_row_has_child_toggled(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-inserted signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the inserted row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the inserted row
*/
vfunc_row_inserted(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Lets the tree unref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
* this means, see gtk_tree_model_ref_node().
*
* Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_unref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
* order. It returns %TRUE unless the `sort_column_id` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID or
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID.
* @returns %TRUE if the sort column is not one of the special sort column ids.
*/
get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, Gtk.SortType];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
* primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
* go back to the default state, or not.
* @returns %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
*/
has_default_sort_func(): boolean;
/**
* Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
* If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the model will sort using
* this function.
*
* If `sort_func` is %NULL, then there will be no default comparison function.
* This means that once the model has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
* default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
* is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
set_default_sort_func(sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc, destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null): void;
/**
* Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
* resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
* #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
* a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID: the default sort function
* will be used, if it is set
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID: no sorting will occur
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
* @param order The sort order of the column
*/
set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: Gtk.SortType | null): void;
/**
* Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
* current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id,` then
* the model will sort using this function.
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
set_sort_func(
sort_column_id: number,
sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc,
destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): void;
/**
* Emits a #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on `sortable`.
*/
sort_column_changed(): void;
/**
* Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
* order. It returns %TRUE unless the `sort_column_id` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID or
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID.
*/
vfunc_get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, Gtk.SortType];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
* primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
* go back to the default state, or not.
*/
vfunc_has_default_sort_func(): boolean;
/**
* Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
* If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the model will sort using
* this function.
*
* If `sort_func` is %NULL, then there will be no default comparison function.
* This means that once the model has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
* default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
* is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_default_sort_func(sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc, destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null): void;
/**
* Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
* resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
* #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
* a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID: the default sort function
* will be used, if it is set
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID: no sorting will occur
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
* @param order The sort order of the column
*/
vfunc_set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: Gtk.SortType): void;
/**
* Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
* current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id,` then
* the model will sort using this function.
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_sort_func(
sort_column_id: number,
sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc,
destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): void;
/**
* Emits a #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on `sortable`.
*/
vfunc_sort_column_changed(): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ComboSelector {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.ComboBox.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.CellEditable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.CellLayout.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
}
}
/**
* A widget that can be used to select a certificate or key. It allows
* the user to select one object from the selector at a time.
*/
class ComboSelector
extends Gtk.ComboBox
implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.CellEditable, Gtk.CellLayout
{
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
/**
* The collection which contains the objects to display in the selector.
*/
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](collection: Gcr.Collection): ComboSelector;
// Conflicted with Gtk.ComboBox.new
static ['new'](...args: never[]): any;
// Methods
/**
* Get the collection that this selector is displaying objects from.
* @returns The collection, owned by the selector.
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get the selected object in the selector, or %NULL if nothing selected.
* @returns the selected object, owned by the selector, or %NULL
*/
get_selected(): T;
/**
* Set the currently selected object in the selector, or clear the selection
* if selected is set to %NULL.
* @param selected the object to select or %NULL
*/
set_selected(selected?: GObject.Object | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
*/
get editing_canceled(): boolean;
set editing_canceled(val: boolean);
/**
* Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
*/
get editingCanceled(): boolean;
set editingCanceled(val: boolean);
get app_paintable(): boolean;
set app_paintable(val: boolean);
get appPaintable(): boolean;
set appPaintable(val: boolean);
get can_default(): boolean;
set can_default(val: boolean);
get canDefault(): boolean;
set canDefault(val: boolean);
get can_focus(): boolean;
set can_focus(val: boolean);
get canFocus(): boolean;
set canFocus(val: boolean);
get composite_child(): boolean;
get compositeChild(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get double_buffered(): boolean;
set double_buffered(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get doubleBuffered(): boolean;
set doubleBuffered(val: boolean);
get events(): Gdk.EventMask;
set events(val: Gdk.EventMask);
/**
* Whether to expand in both directions. Setting this sets both #GtkWidget:hexpand and #GtkWidget:vexpand
*/
get expand(): boolean;
set expand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focus_on_click(): boolean;
set focus_on_click(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focusOnClick(): boolean;
set focusOnClick(val: boolean);
/**
* How to distribute horizontal space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get halign(): Gtk.Align;
set halign(val: Gtk.Align);
get has_default(): boolean;
set has_default(val: boolean);
get hasDefault(): boolean;
set hasDefault(val: boolean);
get has_focus(): boolean;
set has_focus(val: boolean);
get hasFocus(): boolean;
set hasFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get has_tooltip(): boolean;
set has_tooltip(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get hasTooltip(): boolean;
set hasTooltip(val: boolean);
get height_request(): number;
set height_request(val: number);
get heightRequest(): number;
set heightRequest(val: number);
/**
* Whether to expand horizontally. See gtk_widget_set_hexpand().
*/
get hexpand(): boolean;
set hexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpand_set(): boolean;
set hexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpandSet(): boolean;
set hexpandSet(val: boolean);
get is_focus(): boolean;
set is_focus(val: boolean);
get isFocus(): boolean;
set isFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Sets all four sides' margin at once. If read, returns max
* margin on any side.
*/
get margin(): number;
set margin(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_bottom(): number;
set margin_bottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginBottom(): number;
set marginBottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_end(): number;
set margin_end(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginEnd(): number;
set marginEnd(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_left(): number;
set margin_left(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginLeft(): number;
set marginLeft(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_right(): number;
set margin_right(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginRight(): number;
set marginRight(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_start(): number;
set margin_start(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginStart(): number;
set marginStart(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_top(): number;
set margin_top(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginTop(): number;
set marginTop(val: number);
get name(): string;
set name(val: string);
get no_show_all(): boolean;
set no_show_all(val: boolean);
get noShowAll(): boolean;
set noShowAll(val: boolean);
/**
* The requested opacity of the widget. See gtk_widget_set_opacity() for
* more details about window opacity.
*
* Before 3.8 this was only available in GtkWindow
*/
get opacity(): number;
set opacity(val: number);
get parent(): Gtk.Container;
set parent(val: Gtk.Container);
get receives_default(): boolean;
set receives_default(val: boolean);
get receivesDefault(): boolean;
set receivesDefault(val: boolean);
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scale_factor(): number;
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scaleFactor(): number;
get sensitive(): boolean;
set sensitive(val: boolean);
/**
* The style of the widget, which contains information about how it will look (colors, etc).
*/
get style(): Gtk.Style;
set style(val: Gtk.Style);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_markup(): string;
set tooltip_markup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipMarkup(): string;
set tooltipMarkup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_text(): string;
set tooltip_text(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipText(): string;
set tooltipText(val: string);
/**
* How to distribute vertical space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get valign(): Gtk.Align;
set valign(val: Gtk.Align);
/**
* Whether to expand vertically. See gtk_widget_set_vexpand().
*/
get vexpand(): boolean;
set vexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpand_set(): boolean;
set vexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpandSet(): boolean;
set vexpandSet(val: boolean);
get visible(): boolean;
set visible(val: boolean);
get width_request(): number;
set width_request(val: number);
get widthRequest(): number;
set widthRequest(val: number);
/**
* The widget's window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
*/
get window(): Gdk.Window;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
*/
editing_done(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
*/
remove_widget(): void;
/**
* Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
*
* The #GtkCellRenderer for the cell creates and returns a #GtkCellEditable from
* gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing(), configured for the #GtkCellRenderer type.
*
* gtk_cell_editable_start_editing() can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
* editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit #GtkCellEditable::editing-done.
*
* Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
* lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
* @param event The #GdkEvent that began the editing process, or %NULL if editing was initiated programmatically
*/
start_editing(event?: Gdk.Event | null): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
*/
vfunc_editing_done(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
*/
vfunc_remove_widget(): void;
/**
* Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
*
* The #GtkCellRenderer for the cell creates and returns a #GtkCellEditable from
* gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing(), configured for the #GtkCellRenderer type.
*
* gtk_cell_editable_start_editing() can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
* editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit #GtkCellEditable::editing-done.
*
* Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
* lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
* @param event The #GdkEvent that began the editing process, or %NULL if editing was initiated programmatically
*/
vfunc_start_editing(event?: Gdk.Event | null): void;
/**
* Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
*
* The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
* `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
* example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
* “text” attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from column 2.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
* @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
*/
add_attribute(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;
/**
* Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
* removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
*/
clear(): void;
/**
* Clears all existing attributes previously set with
* gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on
*/
clear_attributes(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer): void;
/**
* Returns the underlying #GtkCellArea which might be `cell_layout`
* if called on a #GtkCellArea or might be %NULL if no #GtkCellArea
* is used by `cell_layout`.
* @returns the cell area used by @cell_layout, or %NULL in case no cell area is used.
*/
get_area(): Gtk.CellArea | null;
/**
* Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
* @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has been newly allocated and should be freed with g_list_free() when no longer needed.
*/
get_cells(): Gtk.CellRenderer[];
/**
* Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE, then the
* `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
* divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
pack_end(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE,
* then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
* is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
pack_start(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
*
* Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
* for this to function properly.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to reorder
* @param position new position to insert @cell at
*/
reorder(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, position: number): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use for `cell_layout`.
*
* This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
* for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout’`s
* cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
*
* `func` may be %NULL to remove a previously set function.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param func the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use, or %NULL
*/
set_cell_data_func(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, func?: Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
/**
* Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
*
* The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
* `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
* example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
* “text” attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from column 2.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
* @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
*/
vfunc_add_attribute(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;
/**
* Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
* removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
*/
vfunc_clear(): void;
/**
* Clears all existing attributes previously set with
* gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on
*/
vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer): void;
/**
* Returns the underlying #GtkCellArea which might be `cell_layout`
* if called on a #GtkCellArea or might be %NULL if no #GtkCellArea
* is used by `cell_layout`.
*/
vfunc_get_area(): Gtk.CellArea | null;
/**
* Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
*/
vfunc_get_cells(): Gtk.CellRenderer[];
/**
* Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE, then the
* `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
* divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
vfunc_pack_end(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE,
* then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
* is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
vfunc_pack_start(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
*
* Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
* for this to function properly.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to reorder
* @param position new position to insert @cell at
*/
vfunc_reorder(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, position: number): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use for `cell_layout`.
*
* This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
* for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout’`s
* cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
*
* `func` may be %NULL to remove a previously set function.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param func the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, func?: Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
/**
* For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
* this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
* press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
* activatable, the function returns %FALSE.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget was activatable
*/
activate(): boolean;
/**
* Installs an accelerator for this `widget` in `accel_group` that causes
* `accel_signal` to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
* The `accel_group` needs to be added to the widget’s toplevel via
* gtk_window_add_accel_group(), and the signal must be of type %G_SIGNAL_ACTION.
* Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during
* runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the
* user, use gtk_accel_map_add_entry() and gtk_widget_set_accel_path() or
* gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() instead.
* @param accel_signal widget signal to emit on accelerator activation
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget, added to its toplevel
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @param accel_flags flag accelerators, e.g. %GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE
*/
add_accelerator(
accel_signal: string,
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
accel_flags: Gtk.AccelFlags | null,
): void;
/**
* Adds the device events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_device_events() for details.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Adds the events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_events() and the
* [input handling overview][event-masks] for details.
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
* list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
* widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
* its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
* to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.
* @param label a #GtkWidget that acts as a mnemonic label for @widget
*/
add_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Queues an animation frame update and adds a callback to be called
* before each frame. Until the tick callback is removed, it will be
* called frequently (usually at the frame rate of the output device
* or as quickly as the application can be repainted, whichever is
* slower). For this reason, is most suitable for handling graphics
* that change every frame or every few frames. The tick callback does
* not automatically imply a relayout or repaint. If you want a
* repaint or relayout, and aren’t changing widget properties that
* would trigger that (for example, changing the text of a #GtkLabel),
* then you will have to call gtk_widget_queue_resize() or
* gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() yourself.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() should generally be used for timing
* continuous animations and
* gdk_frame_timings_get_predicted_presentation_time() if you are
* trying to display isolated frames at particular times.
*
* This is a more convenient alternative to connecting directly to the
* #GdkFrameClock::update signal of #GdkFrameClock, since you don't
* have to worry about when a #GdkFrameClock is assigned to a widget.
* @param callback function to call for updating animations
* @returns an id for the connection of this callback. Remove the callback by passing it to gtk_widget_remove_tick_callback()
*/
add_tick_callback(callback: Gtk.TickCallback): number;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
* @returns %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
*/
can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're
* writing an app, you’d use gtk_widget_grab_focus() to move the focus
* to a particular widget, and gtk_container_set_focus_chain() to
* change the focus tab order. So you may want to investigate those
* functions instead.
*
* gtk_widget_child_focus() is called by containers as the user moves
* around the window using keyboard shortcuts. `direction` indicates
* what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab
* forward, tab backward). gtk_widget_child_focus() emits the
* #GtkWidget::focus signal; widgets override the default handler
* for this signal in order to implement appropriate focus behavior.
*
* The default ::focus handler for a widget should return %TRUE if
* moving in `direction` left the focus on a focusable location inside
* that widget, and %FALSE if moving in `direction` moved the focus
* outside the widget. If returning %TRUE, widgets normally
* call gtk_widget_grab_focus() to place the focus accordingly;
* if returning %FALSE, they don’t modify the current focus location.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if focus ended up inside @widget
*/
child_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
child_notify(child_property: string): void;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget’s type,
* never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
*/
class_path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this widget extra space
* when possible. Containers should check this, rather than
* looking at gtk_widget_get_hexpand() or gtk_widget_get_vexpand().
*
* This function already checks whether the widget is visible, so
* visibility does not need to be checked separately. Non-visible
* widgets are not expanded.
*
* The computed expand value uses either the expand setting explicitly
* set on the widget itself, or, if none has been explicitly set,
* the widget may expand if some of its children do.
* @param orientation expand direction
* @returns whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded
*/
compute_expand(orientation: Gtk.Orientation | null): boolean;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoContext with the appropriate font map,
* font options, font description, and base direction for drawing
* text for this widget. See also gtk_widget_get_pango_context().
* @returns the new #PangoContext
*/
create_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
* font description, and base direction for drawing text for
* this widget.
*
* If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, you need
* to re-create it when the widget #PangoContext is replaced.
* This can be tracked by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal
* on the widget.
* @param text text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
* @returns the new #PangoLayout
*/
create_pango_layout(text?: string | null): Pango.Layout;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
destroy(): void;
/**
* This function sets *`widget_pointer` to %NULL if `widget_pointer` !=
* %NULL. It’s intended to be used as a callback connected to the
* “destroy” signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
* as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
* as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
* be set to %NULL. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies
* of the same dialog.
* @param widget_pointer address of a variable that contains @widget
*/
destroyed(widget_pointer: Gtk.Widget): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `device` has been shadowed by a GTK+
* device grab on another widget, so it would stop sending
* events to `widget`. This may be used in the
* #GtkWidget::grab-notify signal to check for specific
* devices. See gtk_device_grab_add().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE if there is an ongoing grab on @device by another #GtkWidget than @widget.
*/
device_is_shadowed(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* This function is equivalent to gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates(),
* passing -1, -1 as coordinates.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event?: Gdk.Event | null,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Initiates a drag on the source side. The function only needs to be used
* when the application is starting drags itself, and is not needed when
* gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
*
* The `event` is used to retrieve the timestamp that will be used internally to
* grab the pointer. If `event` is %NULL, then %GDK_CURRENT_TIME will be used.
* However, you should try to pass a real event in all cases, since that can be
* used to get information about the drag.
*
* Generally there are three cases when you want to start a drag by hand by
* calling this function:
*
* 1. During a #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* immediately when the user presses the mouse button. Pass the `event`
* that you have in your #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler.
*
* 2. During a #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* when the mouse moves past a certain threshold distance after a button-press.
* Pass the `event` that you have in your #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler.
*
* 3. During a timeout handler, if you want to start a drag after the mouse
* button is held down for some time. Try to save the last event that you got
* from the mouse, using gdk_event_copy(), and pass it to this function
* (remember to free the event with gdk_event_free() when you are done).
* If you really cannot pass a real event, pass %NULL instead.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @param x The initial x coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @param y The initial y coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin_with_coordinates(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event: Gdk.Event | null,
x: number,
y: number,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Checks to see if a mouse drag starting at (`start_x,` `start_y)` and ending
* at (`current_x,` `current_y)` has passed the GTK+ drag threshold, and thus
* should trigger the beginning of a drag-and-drop operation.
* @param start_x X coordinate of start of drag
* @param start_y Y coordinate of start of drag
* @param current_x current X coordinate
* @param current_y current Y coordinate
* @returns %TRUE if the drag threshold has been passed.
*/
drag_check_threshold(start_x: number, start_y: number, current_x: number, current_y: number): boolean;
/**
* Add the image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Looks for a match between the supported targets of `context` and the
* `dest_target_list,` returning the first matching target, otherwise
* returning %GDK_NONE. `dest_target_list` should usually be the return
* value from gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list(), but some widgets may
* have different valid targets for different parts of the widget; in
* that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
* passes the correct target list to this function.
* @param context drag context
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (@widget).
* @returns first target that the source offers and the dest can accept, or %GDK_NONE
*/
drag_dest_find_target(context: Gdk.DragContext, target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): Gdk.Atom;
/**
* Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_dest_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
* emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion signals.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget always emits #GtkWidget::drag-motion events
*/
drag_dest_get_track_motion(): boolean;
/**
* Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
*
* The default behaviors listed in `flags` have an effect similar
* to installing default handlers for the widget’s drag-and-drop signals
* (#GtkWidget::drag-motion, #GtkWidget::drag-drop, ...). They all exist
* for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
* sufficient to connect to the widget’s #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
* signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
*
* Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
* as described in the documentation for #GtkWidget::drag-motion. The default
* behaviors described by `flags` make some assumptions, that can conflict
* with your own signal handlers. For instance #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP causes
* invokations of gdk_drag_status() in the context of #GtkWidget::drag-motion,
* and invokations of gtk_drag_finish() in #GtkWidget::drag-data-received.
* Especially the later is dramatic, when your own #GtkWidget::drag-motion
* handler calls gtk_drag_get_data() to inspect the dragged data.
*
* There’s no way to set a default action here, you can use the
* #GtkWidget::drag-motion callback for that. Here’s an example which selects
* the action to use depending on whether the control key is pressed or not:
*
* ```c
* static void
* drag_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
* GdkDragContext *context,
* gint x,
* gint y,
* guint time)
* {
* GdkModifierType mask;
*
* gdk_window_get_pointer (gtk_widget_get_window (widget),
* NULL, NULL, &mask);
* if (mask & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_COPY, time);
* else
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_MOVE, time);
* }
* ```
*
* @param flags which types of default drag behavior to use
* @param targets a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntrys indicating the drop types that this @widget will accept, or %NULL. Later you can access the list with gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list() and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
* @param actions a bitmask of possible actions for a drop onto this @widget.
*/
drag_dest_set(
flags: Gtk.DestDefaults | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets this widget as a proxy for drops to another window.
* @param proxy_window the window to which to forward drag events
* @param protocol the drag protocol which the @proxy_window accepts (You can use gdk_drag_get_protocol() to determine this)
* @param use_coordinates If %TRUE, send the same coordinates to the destination, because it is an embedded subwindow.
*/
drag_dest_set_proxy(
proxy_window: Gdk.Window,
protocol: Gdk.DragProtocol | null,
use_coordinates: boolean,
): void;
/**
* Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
* gtk_drag_dest_set().
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_dest_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Tells the widget to emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion and
* #GtkWidget::drag-leave events regardless of the targets and the
* %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION flag.
*
* This may be used when a widget wants to do generic
* actions regardless of the targets that the source offers.
* @param track_motion whether to accept all targets
*/
drag_dest_set_track_motion(track_motion: boolean): void;
/**
* Clears information about a drop destination set with
* gtk_drag_dest_set(). The widget will no longer receive
* notification of drags.
*/
drag_dest_unset(): void;
/**
* Gets the data associated with a drag. When the data
* is received or the retrieval fails, GTK+ will emit a
* #GtkWidget::drag-data-received signal. Failure of the retrieval
* is indicated by the length field of the `selection_data`
* signal parameter being negative. However, when gtk_drag_get_data()
* is called implicitely because the %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP was set,
* then the widget will not receive notification of failed
* drops.
* @param context the drag context
* @param target the target (form of the data) to retrieve
* @param time_ a timestamp for retrieving the data. This will generally be the time received in a #GtkWidget::drag-motion or #GtkWidget::drag-drop signal
*/
drag_get_data(context: Gdk.DragContext, target: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): void;
/**
* Highlights a widget as a currently hovered drop target.
* To end the highlight, call gtk_drag_unhighlight().
* GTK+ calls this automatically if %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT is set.
*/
drag_highlight(): void;
/**
* Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_source_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Sets up a widget so that GTK+ will start a drag operation when the user
* clicks and drags on the widget. The widget must have a window.
* @param start_button_mask the bitmask of buttons that can start the drag
* @param targets the table of targets that the drag will support, may be %NULL
* @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget
*/
drag_source_set(
start_button_mask: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to `icon`. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon A #GIcon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a themed icon. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon_name name of icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_name(icon_name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular widget
* from a #GdkPixbuf. GTK+ retains a reference for `pixbuf` and will
* release it when it is no longer needed.
* @param pixbuf the #GdkPixbuf for the drag icon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a stock icon.
* @param stock_id the ID of the stock icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_stock(stock_id: string): void;
/**
* Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag source with
* gtk_drag_source_set().
* @param target_list list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_source_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Undoes the effects of gtk_drag_source_set().
*/
drag_source_unset(): void;
/**
* Removes a highlight set by gtk_drag_highlight() from
* a widget.
*/
drag_unhighlight(): void;
/**
* Draws `widget` to `cr`. The top left corner of the widget will be
* drawn to the currently set origin point of `cr`.
*
* You should pass a cairo context as `cr` argument that is in an
* original state. Otherwise the resulting drawing is undefined. For
* example changing the operator using cairo_set_operator() or the
* line width using cairo_set_line_width() might have unwanted side
* effects.
* You may however change the context’s transform matrix - like with
* cairo_scale(), cairo_translate() or cairo_set_matrix() and clip
* region with cairo_clip() prior to calling this function. Also, it
* is fine to modify the context with cairo_save() and
* cairo_push_group() prior to calling this function.
*
* Note that special-purpose widgets may contain special code for
* rendering to the screen and might appear differently on screen
* and when rendered using gtk_widget_draw().
* @param cr a cairo context to draw to
*/
draw(cr: cairo.Context): void;
/**
* Ensures that `widget` has a style (`widget->`style).
*
* Not a very useful function; most of the time, if you
* want the style, the widget is realized, and realized
* widgets are guaranteed to have a style already.
*/
ensure_style(): void;
/**
* Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
* If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
* gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
*
* Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
* ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
* or window manager that is used.
*/
error_bell(): void;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget`. The
* signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
*/
freeze_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
* @returns the #AtkObject associated with @widget
*/
get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves the #GActionGroup that was registered using `prefix`. The resulting
* #GActionGroup may have been registered to `widget` or any #GtkWidget in its
* ancestry.
*
* If no action group was found matching `prefix,` then %NULL is returned.
* @param prefix The “prefix” of the action group.
* @returns A #GActionGroup or %NULL.
*/
get_action_group(prefix: string): Gio.ActionGroup | null;
/**
* Returns the baseline that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function, and when allocating child
* widgets in #GtkWidget::size_allocate.
* @returns the baseline of the @widget, or -1 if none
*/
get_allocated_baseline(): number;
/**
* Returns the height that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the height of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_height(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocated size.
*
* This function returns the last values passed to
* gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline(). The value differs from
* the size returned in gtk_widget_get_allocation() in that functions
* like gtk_widget_set_halign() can adjust the allocation, but not
* the value returned by this function.
*
* If a widget is not visible, its allocated size is 0.
*/
get_allocated_size(): [Gtk.Allocation, number];
/**
* Returns the width that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the width of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_width(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocation.
*
* Note, when implementing a #GtkContainer: a widget’s allocation will
* be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget’s parent
* container typically calls gtk_widget_size_allocate() with an
* allocation, and that allocation is then adjusted (to handle margin
* and alignment for example) before assignment to the widget.
* gtk_widget_get_allocation() returns the adjusted allocation that
* was actually assigned to the widget. The adjusted allocation is
* guaranteed to be completely contained within the
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() allocation, however. So a #GtkContainer
* is guaranteed that its children stay inside the assigned bounds,
* but not that they have exactly the bounds the container assigned.
* There is no way to get the original allocation assigned by
* gtk_widget_size_allocate(), since it isn’t stored; if a container
* implementation needs that information it will have to track it itself.
*/
get_allocation(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Gets the first ancestor of `widget` with type `widget_type`. For example,
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)` gets
* the first #GtkBox that’s an ancestor of `widget`. No reference will be
* added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
* about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
*
* Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
* considers `widget` to be an ancestor of itself.
* @param widget_type ancestor type
* @returns the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
*/
get_ancestor(widget_type: GObject.GType): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
*/
get_app_paintable(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_default(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_focus(): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Obtains
* `widget->`requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
* geometry on the widget (e.g. with gtk_widget_set_size_request()),
* in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
* requisition.
*
* This function differs from gtk_widget_size_request() in that
* it retrieves the last size request value from `widget->`requisition,
* while gtk_widget_size_request() actually calls the "size_request" method
* on `widget` to compute the size request and fill in `widget->`requisition,
* and only then returns `widget->`requisition.
*
* Because this function does not call the “size_request” method, it
* can only be used when you know that `widget->`requisition is
* up-to-date, that is, gtk_widget_size_request() has been called
* since the last time a resize was queued. In general, only container
* implementations have this information; applications should use
* gtk_widget_size_request().
*/
get_child_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
* If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
* needs reorganization.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
*/
get_child_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s clip area.
*
* The clip area is the area in which all of `widget'`s drawing will
* happen. Other toolkits call it the bounding box.
*
* Historically, in GTK+ the clip area has been equal to the allocation
* retrieved via gtk_widget_get_allocation().
*/
get_clip(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
* be used with `widget`. `widget` must have a #GdkDisplay
* associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
* window.
* @param selection a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the default clipboard. Another common value is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives the primary X selection.
* @returns the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard already exists, a new one will be created. Once a clipboard object has been created, it is persistent for all time.
*/
get_clipboard(selection: Gdk.Atom): Gtk.Clipboard;
/**
* Obtains the composite name of a widget.
* @returns the composite name of @widget, or %NULL if @widget is not a composite child. The string should be freed when it is no longer needed.
*/
get_composite_name(): string;
/**
* Returns whether `device` can interact with `widget` and its
* children. See gtk_widget_set_device_enabled().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE is @device is enabled for @widget
*/
get_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
* are the events that the widget will receive when `device` operates on it.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns device event mask for @widget
*/
get_device_events(device: Gdk.Device): Gdk.EventMask;
/**
* Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_direction().
* @returns the reading direction for the widget.
*/
get_direction(): Gtk.TextDirection;
/**
* Get the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create display specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_display(): Gdk.Display;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is double buffered.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
*/
get_double_buffered(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for the widget. These are the
* events that the widget will receive.
*
* Note: Internally, the widget event mask will be the logical OR of the event
* mask set through gtk_widget_set_events() or gtk_widget_add_events(), and the
* event mask necessary to cater for every #GtkEventController created for the
* widget.
* @returns event mask for @widget
*/
get_events(): number;
/**
* Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* See gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*/
get_focus_on_click(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the font map that has been set with gtk_widget_set_font_map().
* @returns A #PangoFontMap, or %NULL
*/
get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;
/**
* Returns the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering. When not set,
* the defaults font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @returns the #cairo_font_options_t or %NULL if not set
*/
get_font_options(): cairo.FontOptions | null;
/**
* Obtains the frame clock for a widget. The frame clock is a global
* “ticker” that can be used to drive animations and repaints. The
* most common reason to get the frame clock is to call
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), in order to get a time to use for
* animating. For example you might record the start of the animation
* with an initial value from gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), and
* then update the animation by calling
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() again during each repaint.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_request_phase() will result in a new frame on the
* clock, but won’t necessarily repaint any widgets. To repaint a
* widget, you have to use gtk_widget_queue_draw() which invalidates
* the widget (thus scheduling it to receive a draw on the next
* frame). gtk_widget_queue_draw() will also end up requesting a frame
* on the appropriate frame clock.
*
* A widget’s frame clock will not change while the widget is
* mapped. Reparenting a widget (which implies a temporary unmap) can
* change the widget’s frame clock.
*
* Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.
* @returns a #GdkFrameClock, or %NULL if widget is unrealized
*/
get_frame_clock(): Gdk.FrameClock | null;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:halign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. Baselines are not supported for horizontal
* alignment.
* @returns the horizontal alignment of @widget
*/
get_halign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @returns current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
*/
get_has_tooltip(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
* gtk_widget_set_has_window().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_has_window(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Containers should use gtk_widget_compute_expand() rather than
* this function, to see whether a widget, or any of its children,
* has the expand flag set. If any child of a widget wants to
* expand, the parent may ask to expand also.
*
* This function only looks at the widget’s own hexpand flag, rather
* than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget
* wants to expand.
* @returns whether hexpand flag is set
*/
get_hexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_hexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @returns whether hexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_hexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is mapped.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
get_mapped(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @returns The bottom margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_bottom(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @returns The end margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_end(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @returns The left margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_left(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @returns The right margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_right(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @returns The start margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_start(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @returns The top margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_top(): number;
/**
* Returns the modifier mask the `widget’`s windowing system backend
* uses for a particular purpose.
*
* See gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask().
* @param intent the use case for the modifier mask
* @returns the modifier mask used for @intent.
*/
get_modifier_mask(intent: Gdk.ModifierIntent | null): Gdk.ModifierType;
/**
* Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
* gtk_widget_modify_style().) If no style has previously set, a new
* #GtkRcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the
* modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
* style, you must call gtk_widget_modify_style(), passing in the
* returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
*
* Caution: passing the style back to gtk_widget_modify_style() will
* normally end up destroying it, because gtk_widget_modify_style() copies
* the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
* thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
* to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
* @returns the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
*/
get_modifier_style(): Gtk.RcStyle;
/**
* Retrieves the name of a widget. See gtk_widget_set_name() for the
* significance of widget names.
* @returns name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed
*/
get_name(): string;
/**
* Returns the current value of the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
* which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all()
* will affect this widget.
* @returns the current value of the “no-show-all” property.
*/
get_no_show_all(): boolean;
/**
* Fetches the requested opacity for this widget.
* See gtk_widget_set_opacity().
* @returns the requested opacity for this widget.
*/
get_opacity(): number;
/**
* Gets a #PangoContext with the appropriate font map, font description,
* and base direction for this widget. Unlike the context returned
* by gtk_widget_create_pango_context(), this context is owned by
* the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes
* or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to
* match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked
* by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal on the widget.
* @returns the #PangoContext for the widget.
*/
get_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Returns the parent container of `widget`.
* @returns the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
*/
get_parent(): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Gets `widget’`s parent window, or %NULL if it does not have one.
* @returns the parent window of @widget, or %NULL if it does not have a parent window.
*/
get_parent_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWidgetPath representing `widget,` if the widget
* is not connected to a toplevel widget, a partial path will be
* created.
* @returns The #GtkWidgetPath representing @widget
*/
get_path(): Gtk.WidgetPath;
/**
* Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(); and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*/
get_pointer(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget, taking
* into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
*
* This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
* not impose any restrictions on the child placement. It can be used
* to deduce toplevel window and menu sizes as well as child widgets in
* free-form containers such as GtkLayout.
*
* Handle with care. Note that the natural height of a height-for-width
* widget will generally be a smaller size than the minimum height, since the required
* height for the natural width is generally smaller than the required height for
* the minimum width.
*
* Use gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width() if you want to support
* baseline alignment.
*/
get_preferred_size(): [Gtk.Requisition | null, Gtk.Requisition | null];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is realized.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is realized, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_realized(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is always treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_receives_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget acts as the default widget when focused, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_receives_default(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
* @returns The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by @widget.
*/
get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s requisition.
*
* This function should only be used by widget implementations in
* order to figure whether the widget’s requisition has actually
* changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
* gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
*
* Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
*/
get_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
* only be called after the widget has been added to a widget
* hierarchy with #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup
* #GdkWindow associated with the window. In general, you should only
* create display specific resources when a widget has been realized,
* and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_root_window(): Gdk.Window;
/**
* Retrieves the internal scale factor that maps from window coordinates
* to the actual device pixels. On traditional systems this is 1, on
* high density outputs, it can be a higher value (typically 2).
*
* See gdk_window_get_scale_factor().
* @returns the scale factor for @widget
*/
get_scale_factor(): number;
/**
* Get the #GdkScreen from the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow
* at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create screen specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;
/**
* Returns the widget’s sensitivity (in the sense of returning
* the value that has been set using gtk_widget_set_sensitive()).
*
* The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
* own and its parent widget’s sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
*/
get_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the settings object holding the settings used for this widget.
*
* Note that this function can only be called when the #GtkWidget
* is attached to a toplevel, since the settings object is specific
* to a particular #GdkScreen.
* @returns the relevant #GtkSettings object
*/
get_settings(): Gtk.Settings;
/**
* Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in `width` or
* `height` indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
* and the natural requisition of the widget will be used instead. See
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
* actually request, call gtk_widget_get_preferred_size() instead of
* this function.
*/
get_size_request(): [number, number];
/**
* Returns the widget’s state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
* @returns the state of @widget.
*/
get_state(): Gtk.StateType;
/**
* Returns the widget state as a flag set. It is worth mentioning
* that the effective %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE state will be
* returned, that is, also based on parent insensitivity, even if
* `widget` itself is sensitive.
*
* Also note that if you are looking for a way to obtain the
* #GtkStateFlags to pass to a #GtkStyleContext method, you
* should look at gtk_style_context_get_state().
* @returns The state flags for widget
*/
get_state_flags(): Gtk.StateFlags;
/**
* Simply an accessor function that returns `widget->`style.
* @returns the widget’s #GtkStyle
*/
get_style(): Gtk.Style;
/**
* Returns the style context associated to `widget`. The returned object is
* guaranteed to be the same for the lifetime of `widget`.
* @returns a #GtkStyleContext. This memory is owned by @widget and must not be freed.
*/
get_style_context(): Gtk.StyleContext;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `widget` is multiple pointer aware. See
* gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice() for more information.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is multidevice aware.
*/
get_support_multidevice(): boolean;
/**
* Fetch an object build from the template XML for `widget_type` in this `widget` instance.
*
* This will only report children which were previously declared with
* gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_full() or one of its
* variants.
*
* This function is only meant to be called for code which is private to the `widget_type` which
* declared the child and is meant for language bindings which cannot easily make use
* of the GObject structure offsets.
* @param widget_type The #GType to get a template child for
* @param name The “id” of the child defined in the template XML
* @returns The object built in the template XML with the id @name
*/
get_template_child(widget_type: GObject.GType, name: string): T;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_markup(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_text(): string | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWindow of the current tooltip. This can be the
* GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set
* using gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window().
* @returns The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
*/
get_tooltip_window(): Gtk.Window;
/**
* This function returns the topmost widget in the container hierarchy
* `widget` is a part of. If `widget` has no parent widgets, it will be
* returned as the topmost widget. No reference will be added to the
* returned widget; it should not be unreferenced.
*
* Note the difference in behavior vs. gtk_widget_get_ancestor();
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW)`
* would return
* %NULL if `widget` wasn’t inside a toplevel window, and if the
* window was inside a #GtkWindow-derived widget which was in turn
* inside the toplevel #GtkWindow. While the second case may
* seem unlikely, it actually happens when a #GtkPlug is embedded
* inside a #GtkSocket within the same application.
*
* To reliably find the toplevel #GtkWindow, use
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel() and call GTK_IS_WINDOW()
* on the result. For instance, to get the title of a widget's toplevel
* window, one might use:
*
* ```c
* static const char *
* get_widget_toplevel_title (GtkWidget *widget)
* {
* GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
* if (GTK_IS_WINDOW (toplevel))
* {
* return gtk_window_get_title (GTK_WINDOW (toplevel));
* }
*
* return NULL;
* }
* ```
*
* @returns the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself if there’s no ancestor.
*/
get_toplevel(): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. If your widget want to support baseline aligned
* children it must use gtk_widget_get_valign_with_baseline(), or
* `g_object_get (widget, "valign", &value, NULL)`, which will
* also report the true value.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget, ignoring baseline alignment
*/
get_valign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property, including
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget
*/
get_valign_with_baseline(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand flag is set
*/
get_vexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_vexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_vexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is visible. If you want to
* take into account whether the widget’s parent is also marked as
* visible, use gtk_widget_is_visible() instead.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_visible().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is visible
*/
get_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the visual that will be used to render `widget`.
* @returns the visual for @widget
*/
get_visual(): Gdk.Visual;
/**
* Returns the widget’s window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
* @returns @widget’s window.
*/
get_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Makes `widget` the current grabbed widget.
*
* This means that interaction with other widgets in the same
* application is blocked and mouse as well as keyboard events
* are delivered to this widget.
*
* If `widget` is not sensitive, it is not set as the current
* grabbed widget and this function does nothing.
*/
grab_add(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to become the default widget. `widget` must be able to be
* a default widget; typically you would ensure this yourself
* by calling gtk_widget_set_can_default() with a %TRUE value.
* The default widget is activated when
* the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
* activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them. Note
* that #GtkEntry widgets require the “activates-default” property
* set to %TRUE before they activate the default widget when Enter
* is pressed and the #GtkEntry is focused.
*/
grab_default(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Removes the grab from the given widget.
*
* You have to pair calls to gtk_grab_add() and gtk_grab_remove().
*
* If `widget` does not have the grab, this function does nothing.
*/
grab_remove(): void;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
* is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse).
*
* See also gtk_grab_add().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
*/
has_grab(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
has_rc_style(): boolean;
/**
* Checks whether there is a #GdkScreen is associated with
* this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated
* screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
* window at the top.
* @returns %TRUE if there is a #GdkScreen associated with the widget.
*/
has_screen(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget should show a visible indication that
* it has the global input focus. This is a convenience function for
* use in ::draw handlers that takes into account whether focus
* indication should currently be shown in the toplevel window of
* `widget`. See gtk_window_get_focus_visible() for more information
* about focus indication.
*
* To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use
* gtk_widget_has_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”
*/
has_visible_focus(): boolean;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
hide(): void;
/**
* Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
* signal on a #GtkWindow. The function calls gtk_widget_hide() on its
* argument, then returns %TRUE. If connected to ::delete-event, the
* result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the
* window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy
* the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
* is received.
* @returns %TRUE
*/
hide_on_delete(): boolean;
/**
* Returns whether the widget is currently being destroyed.
* This information can sometimes be used to avoid doing
* unnecessary work.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is being destroyed
*/
in_destruction(): boolean;
/**
* Creates and initializes child widgets defined in templates. This
* function must be called in the instance initializer for any
* class which assigned itself a template using gtk_widget_class_set_template()
*
* It is important to call this function in the instance initializer
* of a #GtkWidget subclass and not in #GObject.constructed() or
* #GObject.constructor() for two reasons.
*
* One reason is that generally derived widgets will assume that parent
* class composite widgets have been created in their instance
* initializers.
*
* Another reason is that when calling g_object_new() on a widget with
* composite templates, it’s important to build the composite widgets
* before the construct properties are set. Properties passed to g_object_new()
* should take precedence over properties set in the private template XML.
*/
init_template(): void;
/**
* Sets an input shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see
* gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region() for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
input_shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Inserts `group` into `widget`. Children of `widget` that implement
* #GtkActionable can then be associated with actions in `group` by
* setting their “action-name” to
* `prefix`.`action-name`.
*
* If `group` is %NULL, a previously inserted group for `name` is removed
* from `widget`.
* @param name the prefix for actions in @group
* @param group a #GActionGroup, or %NULL
*/
insert_action_group(name: string, group?: Gio.ActionGroup | null): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `area,` storing
* the intersection in `intersection,` and returns %TRUE if there was
* an intersection. `intersection` may be %NULL if you’re only
* interested in whether there was an intersection.
* @param area a rectangle
* @returns %TRUE if there was an intersection
*/
intersect(area: Gdk.Rectangle): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle | null];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is somewhere inside `ancestor,` possibly with
* intermediate containers.
* @param ancestor another #GtkWidget
* @returns %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child, grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
*/
is_ancestor(ancestor: Gtk.Widget): boolean;
/**
* Whether `widget` can rely on having its alpha channel
* drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
* compositing manager is running for `widget’`s screen.
*
* Please note that the semantics of this call will change
* in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
* window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
* @returns %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha channel being drawn correctly.
*/
is_composited(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn
* to if it is mapped and visible.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is drawable, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_drawable(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the widget’s effective sensitivity, which means
* it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
*/
is_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is a toplevel widget.
*
* Currently only #GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible (and out-of-process
* #GtkPlugs) are toplevel widgets. Toplevel widgets have no parent
* widget.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_toplevel(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget and all its parents are marked as
* visible.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See also gtk_widget_get_visible() and gtk_widget_set_visible()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget and all its parents are visible
*/
is_visible(): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, %FALSE if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
*/
keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Lists the closures used by `widget` for accelerator group connections
* with gtk_accel_group_connect_by_path() or gtk_accel_group_connect().
* The closures can be used to monitor accelerator changes on `widget,`
* by connecting to the `GtkAccelGroup:`:accel-changed signal of the
* #GtkAccelGroup of a closure which can be found out with
* gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure().
* @returns a newly allocated #GList of closures
*/
list_accel_closures(): GObject.Closure[];
/**
* Retrieves a %NULL-terminated array of strings containing the prefixes of
* #GActionGroup's available to `widget`.
* @returns a %NULL-terminated array of strings.
*/
list_action_prefixes(): string[];
/**
* Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
* which this widget is the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
* gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
*
* The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
* want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
* callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
* must call `g_list_foreach (result,
* (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and then unref all the
* widgets afterwards.
* @returns the list of mnemonic labels; free this list with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
*/
list_mnemonic_labels(): Gtk.Widget[];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
map(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
* @returns %TRUE if the signal has been handled
*/
mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Sets the base color for a widget in a particular state.
* All other style values are left untouched. The base color
* is the background color used along with the text color
* (see gtk_widget_modify_text()) for widgets such as #GtkEntry
* and #GtkTextView. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > base color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the base color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the base color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_base().
*/
modify_base(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > background color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the background color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
*/
modify_bg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the #GtkWidget
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param primary the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
* @param secondary the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
*/
modify_cursor(primary?: Gdk.Color | null, secondary?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the foreground color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the foreground color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
*/
modify_fg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font()
*/
modify_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Modifies style values on the widget.
*
* Modifications made using this technique take precedence over
* style values set via an RC file, however, they will be overridden
* if a style is explicitly set on the widget using gtk_widget_set_style().
* The #GtkRcStyle-struct is designed so each field can either be
* set or unset, so it is possible, using this function, to modify some
* style values and leave the others unchanged.
*
* Note that modifications made with this function are not cumulative
* with previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_style() or with such
* functions as gtk_widget_modify_fg(). If you wish to retain
* previous values, you must first call gtk_widget_get_modifier_style(),
* make your modifications to the returned style, then call
* gtk_widget_modify_style() with that style. On the other hand,
* if you first call gtk_widget_modify_style(), subsequent calls
* to such functions gtk_widget_modify_fg() will have a cumulative
* effect with the initial modifications.
* @param style the #GtkRcStyle-struct holding the style modifications
*/
modify_style(style: Gtk.RcStyle): void;
/**
* Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* The text color is the foreground color used along with the
* base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base()) for widgets such
* as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the text color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_text().
*/
modify_text(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_background_color()
*/
override_background_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
*
* This function does not act recursively. Setting the color of a
* container does not affect its children. Note that some widgets that
* you may not think of as containers, for instance #GtkButtons,
* are actually containers.
*
* This API is mostly meant as a quick way for applications to
* change a widget appearance. If you are developing a widgets
* library and intend this change to be themeable, it is better
* done by setting meaningful CSS classes in your
* widget/container implementation through gtk_style_context_add_class().
*
* This way, your widget library can install a #GtkCssProvider
* with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK priority in order
* to provide a default styling for those widgets that need so, and
* this theming may fully overridden by the user’s theme.
*
* Note that for complex widgets this may bring in undesired
* results (such as uniform background color everywhere), in
* these cases it is better to fully style such widgets through a
* #GtkCssProvider with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION
* priority.
* @param state the state for which to set the color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_color()
*/
override_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* Note that the underlying properties have the #GdkColor type,
* so the alpha value in `primary` and `secondary` will be ignored.
* @param cursor the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
* @param secondary_cursor the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
*/
override_cursor(cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null, secondary_cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are
* left untouched. See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_font()
*/
override_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color() for overriding the foreground
* or background color.
* @param name the name of the symbolic color to modify
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_symbolic_color()
*/
override_symbolic_color(name: string, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Obtains the full path to `widget`. The path is simply the name of a
* widget and all its parents in the container hierarchy, separated by
* periods. The name of a widget comes from
* gtk_widget_get_name(). Paths are used to apply styles to a widget
* in gtkrc configuration files. Widget names are the type of the
* widget by default (e.g. “GtkButton”) or can be set to an
* application-specific value with gtk_widget_set_name(). By setting
* the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply
* styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc
* file. `path_reversed_p` fills in the path in reverse order,
* i.e. starting with `widget’`s name instead of starting with the name
* of `widget’`s outermost ancestor.
*/
path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
*
* Flags the widget for a rerun of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* function. Use this function instead of gtk_widget_queue_resize()
* when the `widget'`s size request didn't change but it wants to
* reposition its contents.
*
* An example user of this function is gtk_widget_set_halign().
*/
queue_allocate(): void;
/**
* Mark `widget` as needing to recompute its expand flags. Call
* this function when setting legacy expand child properties
* on the child of a container.
*
* See gtk_widget_compute_expand().
*/
queue_compute_expand(): void;
/**
* Equivalent to calling gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() for the
* entire area of a widget.
*/
queue_draw(): void;
/**
* Convenience function that calls gtk_widget_queue_draw_region() on
* the region created from the given coordinates.
*
* The region here is specified in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(), and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*
* `width` or `height` may be 0, in this case this function does
* nothing. Negative values for `width` and `height` are not allowed.
* @param x x coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param y y coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param width width of region to draw
* @param height height of region to draw
*/
queue_draw_area(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
* be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
* For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
* queues a resize to ensure there’s enough space for the new text.
*
* Note that you cannot call gtk_widget_queue_resize() on a widget
* from inside its implementation of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* virtual method. Calls to gtk_widget_queue_resize() from inside
* GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate will be silently ignored.
*/
queue_resize(): void;
/**
* This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
* except that the widget is not invalidated.
*/
queue_resize_no_redraw(): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
realize(): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `region,` returning
* the intersection. The result may be empty, use cairo_region_is_empty() to
* check.
* @param region a #cairo_region_t, in the same coordinate system as @widget->allocation. That is, relative to @widget->window for widgets which return %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window(); relative to the parent window of @widget->window otherwise.
* @returns A newly allocated region holding the intersection of @widget and @region.
*/
region_intersect(region: cairo.Region): cairo.Region;
/**
* Registers a #GdkWindow with the widget and sets it up so that
* the widget receives events for it. Call gtk_widget_unregister_window()
* when destroying the window.
*
* Before 3.8 you needed to call gdk_window_set_user_data() directly to set
* this up. This is now deprecated and you should use gtk_widget_register_window()
* instead. Old code will keep working as is, although some new features like
* transparency might not work perfectly.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
register_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Removes an accelerator from `widget,` previously installed with
* gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @returns whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
*/
remove_accelerator(
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
): boolean;
/**
* Removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). The widget
* must have previously been added to the list with
* gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
* @param label a #GtkWidget that was previously set as a mnemonic label for @widget with gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
*/
remove_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Removes a tick callback previously registered with
* gtk_widget_add_tick_callback().
* @param id an id returned by gtk_widget_add_tick_callback()
*/
remove_tick_callback(id: number): void;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme settings for `widget`
* to look up `stock_id` and render it to a pixbuf. `stock_id` should
* be a stock icon ID such as #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size`
* should be a size such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. `detail` should be a
* string that identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so
* that theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or
* code.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be
* freed after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @param detail render detail to pass to theme engine
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon(stock_id: string, size: number, detail?: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme engine and style
* settings for `widget` to look up `stock_id` and render it to
* a pixbuf. `stock_id` should be a stock icon ID such as
* #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size` should be a size
* such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
* after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon_pixbuf(stock_id: string, size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* Moves a widget from one #GtkContainer to another, handling reference
* count issues to avoid destroying the widget.
* @param new_parent a #GtkContainer to move the widget into
*/
reparent(new_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Reset the styles of `widget` and all descendents, so when
* they are looked up again, they get the correct values
* for the currently loaded RC file settings.
*
* This function is not useful for applications.
*/
reset_rc_styles(): void;
/**
* Updates the style context of `widget` and all descendants
* by updating its widget path. #GtkContainers may want
* to use this on a child when reordering it in a way that a different
* style might apply to it. See also gtk_container_get_path_for_child().
*/
reset_style(): void;
/**
* Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* an expose event on a widget. This function is not normally used
* directly. The only time it is used is when propagating an expose
* event to a windowless child widget (gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE),
* and that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_draw().
*
* If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
* To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
* with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
* @param event a expose #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
send_expose(event: Gdk.Event): number;
/**
* Sends the focus change `event` to `widget`
*
* This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
* should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
* to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
* it’s not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
* window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
*
* An example of its usage is:
*
*
* ```c
* GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
*
* fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
* fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
* fevent->focus_change.window = _gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
* if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
* g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
*
* gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
*
* gdk_event_free (event);
* ```
*
* @param event a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
* @returns the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
*/
send_focus_change(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Given an accelerator group, `accel_group,` and an accelerator path,
* `accel_path,` sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
* key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
* will be activated. This removes any accelerators (for any
* accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
* gtk_widget_set_accel_path(). Associating accelerators with
* paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
* to be saved for future use. (See gtk_accel_map_save().)
*
* This function is a low level function that would most likely
* be used by a menu creation system like #GtkUIManager. If you
* use #GtkUIManager, setting up accelerator paths will be done
* automatically.
*
* Even when you you aren’t using #GtkUIManager, if you only want to
* set up accelerators on menu items gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()
* provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
*
* Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
* pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
* g_intern_static_string().
* @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
* @param accel_group a #GtkAccelGroup.
*/
set_accel_path(accel_path?: string | null, accel_group?: Gtk.AccelGroup | null): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s allocation. This should not be used
* directly, but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
*
* The allocation set should be the “adjusted” or actual
* allocation. If you’re implementing a #GtkContainer, you want to use
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() instead of gtk_widget_set_allocation().
* The GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_allocation virtual method adjusts the
* allocation inside gtk_widget_size_allocate() to create an adjusted
* allocation.
* @param allocation a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_allocation(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* This is a hint to the widget and does not affect the behavior of
* the GTK+ core; many widgets ignore this flag entirely. For widgets
* that do pay attention to the flag, such as #GtkEventBox and #GtkWindow,
* the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's
* background. (Children of the widget will still be drawn.) The application
* is then entirely responsible for drawing the widget background.
*
* Note that the background is still drawn when the widget is mapped.
* @param app_paintable %TRUE if the application will paint on the widget
*/
set_app_paintable(app_paintable: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param can_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_can_default(can_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
* widget.
* @param can_focus whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
*/
set_can_focus(can_focus: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether `widget` should be mapped along with its when its parent
* is mapped and `widget` has been shown with gtk_widget_show().
*
* The child visibility can be set for widget before it is added to
* a container with gtk_widget_set_parent(), to avoid mapping
* children unnecessary before immediately unmapping them. However
* it will be reset to its default state of %TRUE when the widget
* is removed from a container.
*
* Note that changing the child visibility of a widget does not
* queue a resize on the widget. Most of the time, the size of
* a widget is computed from all visible children, whether or
* not they are mapped. If this is not the case, the container
* can queue a resize itself.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @param is_visible if %TRUE, @widget should be mapped along with its parent.
*/
set_child_visible(is_visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s clip. This must not be used directly,
* but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
* It must be called after gtk_widget_set_allocation() (or after chaining up
* to the parent class), because that function resets the clip.
*
* The clip set should be the area that `widget` draws on. If `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, the area must contain all children's clips.
*
* If this function is not called by `widget` during a ::size-allocate handler,
* the clip will be set to `widget'`s allocation.
* @param clip a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_clip(clip: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets a widgets composite name. The widget must be
* a composite child of its parent; see gtk_widget_push_composite_child().
* @param name the name to set
*/
set_composite_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Enables or disables a #GdkDevice to interact with `widget`
* and all its children.
*
* It does so by descending through the #GdkWindow hierarchy
* and enabling the same mask that is has for core events
* (i.e. the one that gdk_window_get_events() returns).
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param enabled whether to enable the device
*/
set_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device, enabled: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive from `device`. Keep
* in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with windowless widgets (which return
* %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window());
* to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
* and receive events on the event box.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events event mask
*/
set_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
* controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
* and also the direction in which the children of a container are
* packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
* so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
* reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
* let the default reading direction present, except for containers
* where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitly
* visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
*
* If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
* set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
* @param dir the new direction
*/
set_direction(dir: Gtk.TextDirection | null): void;
/**
* Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
* to turn off the buffering. “Double buffered” simply means that
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() are called
* automatically around expose events sent to the
* widget. gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() diverts all drawing to a widget's
* window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() draws the
* buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
* update in one smooth step, and don’t see individual graphics
* primitives being rendered.
*
* In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don’t flicker,
* so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
* if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
*
* Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
* expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
* pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame()).
*
* In 3.10 GTK and GDK have been restructured for translucent drawing. Since
* then expose events for double-buffered widgets are culled into a single
* event to the toplevel GDK window. If you now unset double buffering, you
* will cause a separate rendering pass for every widget. This will likely
* cause rendering problems - in particular related to stacking - and usually
* increases rendering times significantly.
* @param double_buffered %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
*/
set_double_buffered(double_buffered: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind
* that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with widgets that have no window.
* (See gtk_widget_get_has_window()). To get events on those widgets,
* place them inside a #GtkEventBox and receive events on the event
* box.
* @param events event mask
*/
set_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
* you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
* application.
* @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
*/
set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the font map to use for Pango rendering. When not set, the widget
* will inherit the font map from its parent.
* @param font_map a #PangoFontMap, or %NULL to unset any previously set font map
*/
set_font_map(font_map?: Pango.FontMap | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering in this widget.
* When not set, the default font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @param options a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any previously set default font options.
*/
set_font_options(options?: cairo.FontOptions | null): void;
/**
* Sets the horizontal alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:halign property.
* @param align the horizontal alignment
*/
set_halign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets the has-tooltip property on `widget` to `has_tooltip`. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @param has_tooltip whether or not @widget has a tooltip.
*/
set_has_tooltip(has_tooltip: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
* all realized widgets have a non-%NULL “window” pointer
* (gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
* is realized), but for many of them it’s actually the #GdkWindow of
* one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
* themselves in #GtkWidget::realize must announce this by
* calling this function with `has_window` = %FALSE.
*
* This function should only be called by widget implementations,
* and they should call it in their init() function.
* @param has_window whether or not @widget has a window.
*/
set_has_window(has_window: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Call this function to set the expand flag if you would like your
* widget to become larger horizontally when the window has extra
* room.
*
* By default, widgets automatically expand if any of their children
* want to expand. (To see if a widget will automatically expand given
* its current children and state, call gtk_widget_compute_expand(). A
* container can decide how the expandability of children affects the
* expansion of the container by overriding the compute_expand virtual
* method on #GtkWidget.).
*
* Setting hexpand explicitly with this function will override the
* automatic expand behavior.
*
* This function forces the widget to expand or not to expand,
* regardless of children. The override occurs because
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() sets the hexpand-set property (see
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()) which causes the widget’s hexpand
* value to be used, rather than looking at children and widget state.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_hexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the hexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_hexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* The hexpand-set property will be set automatically when you call
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() to set hexpand, so the most likely
* reason to use this function would be to unset an explicit expand
* flag.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @param set value for hexpand-set property
*/
set_hexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being mapped.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “map” or “unmap” implementation.
* @param mapped %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
*/
set_mapped(mapped: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the bottom margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @param margin the bottom margin
*/
set_margin_bottom(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the end margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @param margin the end margin
*/
set_margin_end(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the left margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @param margin the left margin
*/
set_margin_left(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the right margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @param margin the right margin
*/
set_margin_right(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the start margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @param margin the start margin
*/
set_margin_start(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the top margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @param margin the top margin
*/
set_margin_top(margin: number): void;
/**
* Widgets can be named, which allows you to refer to them from a
* CSS file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name
* in the CSS file. See the documentation for the CSS syntax (on the
* same page as the docs for #GtkStyleContext).
*
* Note that the CSS syntax has certain special characters to delimit
* and represent elements in a selector (period, #, >, *...), so using
* these will make your widget impossible to match by name. Any combination
* of alphanumeric symbols, dashes and underscores will suffice.
* @param name name for the widget
*/
set_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property, which determines whether
* calls to gtk_widget_show_all() will affect this widget.
*
* This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally
* controlled visibility, see #GtkUIManager.
* @param no_show_all the new value for the “no-show-all” property
*/
set_no_show_all(no_show_all: boolean): void;
/**
* Request the `widget` to be rendered partially transparent,
* with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Opacity values
* are clamped to the [0,1] range.).
* This works on both toplevel widget, and child widgets, although there
* are some limitations:
*
* For toplevel widgets this depends on the capabilities of the windowing
* system. On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
* running. See gtk_widget_is_composited(). On Windows it should work
* always, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
* shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
*
* For child widgets it doesn’t work if any affected widget has a native window, or
* disables double buffering.
* @param opacity desired opacity, between 0 and 1
*/
set_opacity(opacity: number): void;
/**
* This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
* #GtkContainer.
* Sets the container as the parent of `widget,` and takes care of
* some details such as updating the state and style of the child
* to reflect its new location. The opposite function is
* gtk_widget_unparent().
* @param parent parent container
*/
set_parent(parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Sets a non default parent window for `widget`.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, setting a `parent_window` effects whether
* the window is a toplevel window or can be embedded into other
* widgets.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, this needs to be called before the
* window is realized.
* @param parent_window the new parent window.
*/
set_parent_window(parent_window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being realized. This function must only be
* called after all #GdkWindows for the `widget` have been created
* and registered.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “realize” or “unrealize” implementation.
* @param realized %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
*/
set_realized(realized: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` will be treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param receives_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_receives_default(receives_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
* allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
* the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
* leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
* setting off will improve performance.
*
* Note that for widgets where gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE
* setting this flag to %FALSE turns off all allocation on resizing:
* the widget will not even redraw if its position changes; this is to
* allow containers that don’t draw anything to avoid excess
* invalidations. If you set this flag on a widget with no window that
* does draw on `widget->`window, you are
* responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation of the
* widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
* regions newly when the widget increases size.
* @param redraw_on_allocate if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
*/
set_redraw_on_allocate(redraw_on_allocate: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
* can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are “grayed out” and the
* user can’t interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
* “inactive”, “disabled”, or “ghosted” in some other toolkits.
* @param sensitive %TRUE to make the widget sensitive
*/
set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget’s size
* request will be at least `width` by `height`. You can use this
* function to force a widget to be larger than it normally would be.
*
* In most cases, gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for
* toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will
* still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request
* will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size
* request. When dealing with window sizes,
* gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful function as well.
*
* Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
* translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
* can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
* basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
* correct.
*
* The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can
* accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly.
* However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than
* its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more
* space than it requested.
*
* If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then
* the “natural” size request of the widget will be used instead.
*
* The size request set here does not include any margin from the
* #GtkWidget properties margin-left, margin-right, margin-top, and
* margin-bottom, but it does include pretty much all other padding
* or border properties set by any subclass of #GtkWidget.
* @param width width @widget should request, or -1 to unset
* @param height height @widget should request, or -1 to unset
*/
set_size_request(width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
* of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
* the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
* @param state new state for @widget
*/
set_state(state: Gtk.StateType | null): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns on flag
* values in the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
*
* This function accepts the values %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_LTR and
* %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_RTL but ignores them. If you want to set the widget's
* direction, use gtk_widget_set_direction().
*
* It is worth mentioning that any other state than %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE,
* will be propagated down to all non-internal children if `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, while %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE itself will be propagated
* down to all #GtkContainer children by different means than turning on the
* state flag down the hierarchy, both gtk_widget_get_state_flags() and
* gtk_widget_is_sensitive() will make use of these.
* @param flags State flags to turn on
* @param clear Whether to clear state before turning on @flags
*/
set_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null, clear: boolean): void;
/**
* Used to set the #GtkStyle for a widget (`widget->`style). Since
* GTK 3, this function does nothing, the passed in style is ignored.
* @param style a #GtkStyle, or %NULL to remove the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
*/
set_style(style?: Gtk.Style | null): void;
/**
* Enables or disables multiple pointer awareness. If this setting is %TRUE,
* `widget` will start receiving multiple, per device enter/leave events. Note
* that if custom #GdkWindows are created in #GtkWidget::realize,
* gdk_window_set_support_multidevice() will have to be called manually on them.
* @param support_multidevice %TRUE to support input from multiple devices.
*/
set_support_multidevice(support_multidevice: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
* the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
*
* This function will take care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE
* and of the default handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup property and
* gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
* @param markup the contents of the tooltip for @widget, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_markup(markup?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
* care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE and of the default
* handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-text property and gtk_tooltip_set_text().
* @param text the contents of the tooltip for @widget
*/
set_tooltip_text(text?: string | null): void;
/**
* Replaces the default window used for displaying
* tooltips with `custom_window`. GTK+ will take care of showing and
* hiding `custom_window` at the right moment, to behave likewise as
* the default tooltip window. If `custom_window` is %NULL, the default
* tooltip window will be used.
* @param custom_window a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_window(custom_window?: Gtk.Window | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:valign property.
* @param align the vertical alignment
*/
set_valign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand() for more detail.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_vexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the vexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_vexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @param set value for vexpand-set property
*/
set_vexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visibility state of `widget`. Note that setting this to
* %TRUE doesn’t mean the widget is actually viewable, see
* gtk_widget_get_visible().
*
* This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
* but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
* some condition.
* @param visible whether the widget should be shown or not
*/
set_visible(visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visual that should be used for by widget and its children for
* creating #GdkWindows. The visual must be on the same #GdkScreen as
* returned by gtk_widget_get_screen(), so handling the
* #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal is necessary.
*
* Setting a new `visual` will not cause `widget` to recreate its windows,
* so you should call this function before `widget` is realized.
* @param visual visual to be used or %NULL to unset a previous one
*/
set_visual(visual?: Gdk.Visual | null): void;
/**
* Sets a widget’s window. This function should only be used in a
* widget’s #GtkWidget::realize implementation. The %window passed is
* usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
* window of its parent widget as returned by
* gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
*
* Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
* by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
* widget’s init() function.
*
* Note that this function does not add any reference to `window`.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
set_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Sets a shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* transparent windows etc., see gdk_window_shape_combine_region()
* for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
show_all(): void;
/**
* Shows a widget. If the widget is an unmapped toplevel widget
* (i.e. a #GtkWindow that has not yet been shown), enter the main
* loop and wait for the window to actually be mapped. Be careful;
* because the main loop is running, anything can happen during
* this function.
*/
show_now(): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size,
* position and (optionally) baseline to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation and baseline may be adjusted. It
* will be forced to a 1x1 minimum size, and the
* adjust_size_allocation virtual and adjust_baseline_allocation
* methods on the child will be used to adjust the allocation and
* baseline. Standard adjustments include removing the widget's
* margins, and applying the widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and
* #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* If the child widget does not have a valign of %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE the
* baseline argument is ignored and -1 is used instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
* @param baseline The baseline of the child, or -1
*/
size_allocate_with_baseline(allocation: Gtk.Allocation, baseline: number): void;
/**
* This function is typically used when implementing a #GtkContainer
* subclass. Obtains the preferred size of a widget. The container
* uses this information to arrange its child widgets and decide what
* size allocations to give them with gtk_widget_size_allocate().
*
* You can also call this function from an application, with some
* caveats. Most notably, getting a size request requires the widget
* to be associated with a screen, because font information may be
* needed. Multihead-aware applications should keep this in mind.
*
* Also remember that the size request is not necessarily the size
* a widget will actually be allocated.
*/
size_request(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* This function attaches the widget’s #GtkStyle to the widget's
* #GdkWindow. It is a replacement for
*
*
* ```
* widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
* ```
*
*
* and should only ever be called in a derived widget’s “realize”
* implementation which does not chain up to its parent class'
* “realize” implementation, because one of the parent classes
* (finally #GtkWidget) would attach the style itself.
*/
style_attach(): void;
/**
* Gets the value of a style property of `widget`.
* @param property_name the name of a style property
* @param value location to return the property value
*/
style_get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
* This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget` to be
* emitted.
*/
thaw_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Translate coordinates relative to `src_widget’`s allocation to coordinates
* relative to `dest_widget’`s allocations. In order to perform this
* operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
* toplevel.
* @param dest_widget a #GtkWidget
* @param src_x X position relative to @src_widget
* @param src_y Y position relative to @src_widget
* @returns %FALSE if either widget was not realized, or there was no common ancestor. In this case, nothing is stored in *@dest_x and *@dest_y. Otherwise %TRUE.
*/
translate_coordinates(dest_widget: Gtk.Widget, src_x: number, src_y: number): [boolean, number, number];
/**
* Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of `widget`
* is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
* information.
*/
trigger_tooltip_query(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
unmap(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Should be called by implementations of the remove method
* on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
*/
unparent(): void;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
unrealize(): void;
/**
* Unregisters a #GdkWindow from the widget that was previously set up with
* gtk_widget_register_window(). You need to call this when the window is
* no longer used by the widget, such as when you destroy it.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
unregister_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns off flag
* values for the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
* See gtk_widget_set_state_flags().
* @param flags State flags to turn off
*/
unset_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_allocation(baseline: number): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_request(minimum_baseline: number, natural_baseline: number): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size allocation assigned
* by a #GtkContainer using gtk_widget_size_allocate(), into an actual
* size allocation to be used by the widget. adjust_size_allocation
* adjusts to a child widget’s actual allocation
* from what a parent container computed for the
* child. The adjusted allocation must be entirely within the original
* allocation. In any custom implementation, chain up to the default
* #GtkWidget implementation of this method, which applies the margin
* and alignment properties of #GtkWidget. Chain up
* before performing your own adjustments so your
* own adjustments remove more allocation after the #GtkWidget base
* class has already removed margin and alignment. The natural size
* passed in should be adjusted in the same way as the allocated size,
* which allows adjustments to perform alignments or other changes
* based on natural size.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
* @param allocated_pos
* @param allocated_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_allocation(
orientation: Gtk.Orientation,
minimum_size: number,
natural_size: number,
allocated_pos: number,
allocated_size: number,
): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size request from a widget's
* #GtkSizeRequestMode virtual method implementations into a size request to
* be used by parent containers in laying out the widget.
* adjust_size_request adjusts from a child widget's
* original request to what a parent container should
* use for layout. The `for_size` argument will be -1 if the request should
* not be for a particular size in the opposing orientation, i.e. if the
* request is not height-for-width or width-for-height. If `for_size` is
* greater than -1, it is the proposed allocation in the opposing
* orientation that we need the request for. Implementations of
* adjust_size_request should chain up to the default implementation,
* which applies #GtkWidget’s margin properties and imposes any values
* from gtk_widget_set_size_request(). Chaining up should be last,
* after your subclass adjusts the request, so
* #GtkWidget can apply constraints and add the margin properly.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_request(orientation: Gtk.Orientation, minimum_size: number, natural_size: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_press_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_release_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
*/
vfunc_can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
vfunc_child_notify(child_property: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the composited status of
* widgets screen changes. See gdk_screen_is_composited().
*/
vfunc_composited_changed(): void;
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this
* widget extra space when possible.
* @param hexpand_p
* @param vexpand_p
*/
vfunc_compute_expand(hexpand_p: boolean, vexpand_p: boolean): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the size, position or
* stacking of the widget’s window has changed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_configure_event(event: Gdk.EventConfigure): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a redirected window belonging to
* widget gets drawn into.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_damage_event(event: Gdk.EventExpose): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted if a user requests that a toplevel
* window is closed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_delete_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
vfunc_destroy(): void;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a #GdkWindow is destroyed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_destroy_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the text direction of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_direction
*/
vfunc_direction_changed(previous_direction: Gtk.TextDirection): void;
/**
* Seldomly overidden.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_child_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* started.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_begin(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag
* with the action %GDK_ACTION_MOVE is successfully completed.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_data_delete(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when the drop
* site requests the data which is dragged.
* @param context
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_get(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the
* dragged data has been received.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_received(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
x: number,
y: number,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the user drops the
* data onto the widget.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_drop(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* finished.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_end(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag has
* failed.
* @param context
* @param result
*/
vfunc_drag_failed(context: Gdk.DragContext, result: Gtk.DragResult): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves
* the widget.
* @param context
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_leave(context: Gdk.DragContext, time_: number): void;
/**
* signal emitted on the drop site when the user moves
* the cursor over the widget during a drag.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_motion(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.
* @param cr
*/
vfunc_draw(cr: cairo.Context): boolean;
/**
* Signal event will be emitted when the pointer
* enters the widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_enter_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
*/
vfunc_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
vfunc_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus enters the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_in_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_out_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
*/
vfunc_get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
*/
vfunc_get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Signal emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab
* on a window belonging to widget gets broken.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_grab_broken_event(event: Gdk.EventGrabBroken): boolean;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
vfunc_grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget becomes shadowed by a
* GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on another widget, or
* when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab being removed.
* @param was_grabbed
*/
vfunc_grab_notify(was_grabbed: boolean): void;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
vfunc_hide(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the anchored state of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_toplevel
*/
vfunc_hierarchy_changed(previous_toplevel: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a key is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_press_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a key is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_release_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
*/
vfunc_keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Will be emitted when the pointer leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_leave_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
vfunc_map(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is mapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_map_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
*/
vfunc_mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the pointer moves over
* the widget’s #GdkWindow.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_motion_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventMotion): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a change of focus is requested
* @param direction
*/
vfunc_move_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new parent has been set on a
* widget.
* @param previous_parent
*/
vfunc_parent_set(previous_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted whenever a widget should pop up a
* context menu.
*/
vfunc_popup_menu(): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a property on
* the widget’s window has been changed or deleted.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_property_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventProperty): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_in_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_out_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when “has-tooltip” is %TRUE and the
* hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering “above”
* widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.
* @param x
* @param y
* @param keyboard_tooltip
* @param tooltip
*/
vfunc_query_tooltip(x: number, y: number, keyboard_tooltip: boolean, tooltip: Gtk.Tooltip): boolean;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
vfunc_queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
vfunc_realize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the screen of a widget has
* changed.
* @param previous_screen
*/
vfunc_screen_changed(previous_screen: Gdk.Screen): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is
* pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_scroll_event(event: Gdk.EventScroll): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the the
* widget’s window has lost ownership of a selection.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_clear_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_get(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, info: number, time_: number): void;
vfunc_selection_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_received(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, time_: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when another
* client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget's
* window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_request_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
vfunc_show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
vfunc_show_all(): void;
vfunc_show_help(help_type: Gtk.WidgetHelpType): boolean;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
vfunc_size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state
* changes. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_state
*/
vfunc_state_changed(previous_state: Gtk.StateType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state changes,
* see gtk_widget_get_state_flags().
* @param previous_state_flags
*/
vfunc_state_flags_changed(previous_state_flags: Gtk.StateFlags): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new style has been set on a
* widget. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_style
*/
vfunc_style_set(previous_style: Gtk.Style): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the GtkStyleContext of a widget
* is changed.
*/
vfunc_style_updated(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a touch event happens
* @param event
*/
vfunc_touch_event(event: Gdk.EventTouch): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
vfunc_unmap(): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the widget’s window is
* unmapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_unmap_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
vfunc_unrealize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is
* obscured or unobscured.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_visibility_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventVisibility): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the state of the toplevel
* window associated to the widget changes.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_window_state_event(event: Gdk.EventWindowState): boolean;
}
namespace FailureRenderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Renderer.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
label: string;
}
}
/**
* A renderer that can be used for unsupported data.
*/
class FailureRenderer extends GObject.Object implements Renderer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](label: string | null, error: GLib.Error): FailureRenderer;
// Static methods
/**
* Create a new renderer for unsupported data.
* @param label the label for the failure
*/
static new_unsupported(label: string): Renderer;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Get the PKCS#11 attributes, if any, set for this renderer to display.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Set the PKCS#11 attributes for this renderer to display.
* @param attrs attributes to set
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ImportButton {
// Signal callback interfaces
interface Imported {
(importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error): void;
}
interface Importing {
(importer: GObject.Object): void;
}
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Button.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Actionable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Activatable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
}
/**
* A button which imports keys and certificates.
*
* The import button shows a spinner when the button is activated. When more
* than one importer is available, it shows a drop down to select which to
* import to.
*/
class ImportButton
extends Gtk.Button
implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Actionable, Gtk.Activatable, Gtk.Buildable
{
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](label?: string | null): ImportButton;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Button.new
static ['new'](...args: never[]): any;
// Signals
connect(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
connect_after(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
emit(id: string, ...args: any[]): void;
connect(
signal: 'imported',
callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error) => void,
): number;
connect_after(
signal: 'imported',
callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error) => void,
): number;
emit(signal: 'imported', importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error): void;
connect(signal: 'importing', callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object) => void): number;
connect_after(signal: 'importing', callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object) => void): number;
emit(signal: 'importing', importer: GObject.Object): void;
// Virtual methods
/**
* Emitted when the import completes, or fails.
* @param importer
* @param error
*/
vfunc_imported(importer: Gcr.Importer, error: GLib.Error): void;
/**
* Emitted when the import begins.
* @param importer
*/
vfunc_importing(importer: Gcr.Importer): void;
// Methods
/**
* Queue an item to import via the button
* @param parsed a parsed item
*/
add_parsed(parsed: Gcr.Parsed): void;
// Inherited properties
get action_name(): string;
set action_name(val: string);
get actionName(): string;
set actionName(val: string);
get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);
get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);
/**
* The action that this activatable will activate and receive
* updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the this property and
* > call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.
*/
get related_action(): Gtk.Action;
set related_action(val: Gtk.Action);
/**
* The action that this activatable will activate and receive
* updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the this property and
* > call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.
*/
get relatedAction(): Gtk.Action;
set relatedAction(val: Gtk.Action);
/**
* Whether this activatable should reset its layout
* and appearance when setting the related action or when
* the action changes appearance.
*
* See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
* should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
* > and call gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() on the activatable
* > widget when it changes.
*/
get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether this activatable should reset its layout
* and appearance when setting the related action or when
* the action changes appearance.
*
* See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
* should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
* > and call gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() on the activatable
* > widget when it changes.
*/
get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);
get app_paintable(): boolean;
set app_paintable(val: boolean);
get appPaintable(): boolean;
set appPaintable(val: boolean);
get can_default(): boolean;
set can_default(val: boolean);
get canDefault(): boolean;
set canDefault(val: boolean);
get can_focus(): boolean;
set can_focus(val: boolean);
get canFocus(): boolean;
set canFocus(val: boolean);
get composite_child(): boolean;
get compositeChild(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get double_buffered(): boolean;
set double_buffered(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get doubleBuffered(): boolean;
set doubleBuffered(val: boolean);
get events(): Gdk.EventMask;
set events(val: Gdk.EventMask);
/**
* Whether to expand in both directions. Setting this sets both #GtkWidget:hexpand and #GtkWidget:vexpand
*/
get expand(): boolean;
set expand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focus_on_click(): boolean;
set focus_on_click(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focusOnClick(): boolean;
set focusOnClick(val: boolean);
/**
* How to distribute horizontal space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get halign(): Gtk.Align;
set halign(val: Gtk.Align);
get has_default(): boolean;
set has_default(val: boolean);
get hasDefault(): boolean;
set hasDefault(val: boolean);
get has_focus(): boolean;
set has_focus(val: boolean);
get hasFocus(): boolean;
set hasFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get has_tooltip(): boolean;
set has_tooltip(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get hasTooltip(): boolean;
set hasTooltip(val: boolean);
get height_request(): number;
set height_request(val: number);
get heightRequest(): number;
set heightRequest(val: number);
/**
* Whether to expand horizontally. See gtk_widget_set_hexpand().
*/
get hexpand(): boolean;
set hexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpand_set(): boolean;
set hexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpandSet(): boolean;
set hexpandSet(val: boolean);
get is_focus(): boolean;
set is_focus(val: boolean);
get isFocus(): boolean;
set isFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Sets all four sides' margin at once. If read, returns max
* margin on any side.
*/
get margin(): number;
set margin(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_bottom(): number;
set margin_bottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginBottom(): number;
set marginBottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_end(): number;
set margin_end(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginEnd(): number;
set marginEnd(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_left(): number;
set margin_left(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginLeft(): number;
set marginLeft(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_right(): number;
set margin_right(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginRight(): number;
set marginRight(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_start(): number;
set margin_start(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginStart(): number;
set marginStart(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_top(): number;
set margin_top(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginTop(): number;
set marginTop(val: number);
get name(): string;
set name(val: string);
get no_show_all(): boolean;
set no_show_all(val: boolean);
get noShowAll(): boolean;
set noShowAll(val: boolean);
/**
* The requested opacity of the widget. See gtk_widget_set_opacity() for
* more details about window opacity.
*
* Before 3.8 this was only available in GtkWindow
*/
get opacity(): number;
set opacity(val: number);
get parent(): Gtk.Container;
set parent(val: Gtk.Container);
get receives_default(): boolean;
set receives_default(val: boolean);
get receivesDefault(): boolean;
set receivesDefault(val: boolean);
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scale_factor(): number;
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scaleFactor(): number;
get sensitive(): boolean;
set sensitive(val: boolean);
/**
* The style of the widget, which contains information about how it will look (colors, etc).
*/
get style(): Gtk.Style;
set style(val: Gtk.Style);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_markup(): string;
set tooltip_markup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipMarkup(): string;
set tooltipMarkup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_text(): string;
set tooltip_text(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipText(): string;
set tooltipText(val: string);
/**
* How to distribute vertical space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get valign(): Gtk.Align;
set valign(val: Gtk.Align);
/**
* Whether to expand vertically. See gtk_widget_set_vexpand().
*/
get vexpand(): boolean;
set vexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpand_set(): boolean;
set vexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpandSet(): boolean;
set vexpandSet(val: boolean);
get visible(): boolean;
set visible(val: boolean);
get width_request(): number;
set width_request(val: number);
get widthRequest(): number;
set widthRequest(val: number);
/**
* The widget's window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
*/
get window(): Gdk.Window;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Gets the action name for `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_name() for more information.
* @returns the action name, or %NULL if none is set
*/
get_action_name(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value() for more information.
* @returns the current target value
*/
get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;
/**
* Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
* associated. If `action_name` is %NULL then the widget will be
* unassociated from any previous action.
*
* Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
* located) within the hierarchy of a #GtkApplicationWindow.
*
* Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
* containing #GtkApplicationWindow or its associated #GtkApplication,
* respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the #GMenu
* associated with the window.
* @param action_name an action name, or %NULL
*/
set_action_name(action_name?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
*
* If `target_value` is %NULL then the target value is unset.
*
* The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the
* parameter to activation of the action associated with the
* #GtkActionable widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
* should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
* is equal to the given target.
*
* Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a #GAction
* with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
* will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
* value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
* the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
* the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
* is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
* be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
* rendered inactive).
* @param target_value a #GVariant to set as the target value, or %NULL
*/
set_action_target_value(target_value?: GLib.Variant | null): void;
/**
* Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
* actionable widget.
*
* `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
* g_action_parse_detailed_name().
*
* (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
* this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
* `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
* `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
* as the target.)
* @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
*/
set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;
/**
* Gets the action name for `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_name() for more information.
*/
vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value() for more information.
*/
vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;
/**
* Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
* associated. If `action_name` is %NULL then the widget will be
* unassociated from any previous action.
*
* Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
* located) within the hierarchy of a #GtkApplicationWindow.
*
* Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
* containing #GtkApplicationWindow or its associated #GtkApplication,
* respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the #GMenu
* associated with the window.
* @param action_name an action name, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_action_name(action_name?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
*
* If `target_value` is %NULL then the target value is unset.
*
* The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the
* parameter to activation of the action associated with the
* #GtkActionable widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
* should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
* is equal to the given target.
*
* Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a #GAction
* with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
* will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
* value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
* the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
* the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
* is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
* be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
* rendered inactive).
* @param target_value a #GVariant to set as the target value, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value?: GLib.Variant | null): void;
/**
* This is a utility function for #GtkActivatable implementors.
*
* When implementing #GtkActivatable you must call this when
* handling changes of the #GtkActivatable:related-action, and
* you must also use this to break references in #GObject->dispose().
*
* This function adds a reference to the currently set related
* action for you, it also makes sure the #GtkActivatable->update()
* method is called when the related #GtkAction properties change
* and registers to the action’s proxy list.
*
* > Be careful to call this before setting the local
* > copy of the #GtkAction property, since this function uses
* > gtk_activatable_get_related_action() to retrieve the
* > previous action.
* @param action the #GtkAction to set
*/
do_set_related_action(action: Gtk.Action): void;
/**
* Gets the related #GtkAction for `activatable`.
* @returns the related #GtkAction if one is set.
*/
get_related_action(): Gtk.Action;
/**
* Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
* and appearance when setting the related action or when
* the action changes appearance.
* @returns whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
*/
get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;
/**
* Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the #GtkActivatable:related-action
* > property and call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.
* @param action the #GtkAction to set
*/
set_related_action(action: Gtk.Action): void;
/**
* Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
* when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the
* > #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance property and call
* > gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() to update `activatable`
* > if needed.
* @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
*/
set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;
/**
* This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
* internally when the #GtkActivatable:related-action property is set
* or unset and by the implementing class when
* #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance changes.
* @param action the related #GtkAction or %NULL
*/
sync_action_properties(action?: Gtk.Action | null): void;
/**
* This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
* internally when the #GtkActivatable:related-action property is set
* or unset and by the implementing class when
* #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance changes.
* @param action the related #GtkAction or %NULL
*/
vfunc_sync_action_properties(action?: Gtk.Action | null): void;
/**
* Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
* You must check the #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance property only apply action
* properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
* @param action
* @param property_name
*/
vfunc_update(action: Gtk.Action, property_name: string): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
/**
* For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
* this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
* press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
* activatable, the function returns %FALSE.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget was activatable
*/
activate(): boolean;
/**
* Installs an accelerator for this `widget` in `accel_group` that causes
* `accel_signal` to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
* The `accel_group` needs to be added to the widget’s toplevel via
* gtk_window_add_accel_group(), and the signal must be of type %G_SIGNAL_ACTION.
* Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during
* runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the
* user, use gtk_accel_map_add_entry() and gtk_widget_set_accel_path() or
* gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() instead.
* @param accel_signal widget signal to emit on accelerator activation
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget, added to its toplevel
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @param accel_flags flag accelerators, e.g. %GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE
*/
add_accelerator(
accel_signal: string,
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
accel_flags: Gtk.AccelFlags | null,
): void;
/**
* Adds the device events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_device_events() for details.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Adds the events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_events() and the
* [input handling overview][event-masks] for details.
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
* list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
* widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
* its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
* to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.
* @param label a #GtkWidget that acts as a mnemonic label for @widget
*/
add_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Queues an animation frame update and adds a callback to be called
* before each frame. Until the tick callback is removed, it will be
* called frequently (usually at the frame rate of the output device
* or as quickly as the application can be repainted, whichever is
* slower). For this reason, is most suitable for handling graphics
* that change every frame or every few frames. The tick callback does
* not automatically imply a relayout or repaint. If you want a
* repaint or relayout, and aren’t changing widget properties that
* would trigger that (for example, changing the text of a #GtkLabel),
* then you will have to call gtk_widget_queue_resize() or
* gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() yourself.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() should generally be used for timing
* continuous animations and
* gdk_frame_timings_get_predicted_presentation_time() if you are
* trying to display isolated frames at particular times.
*
* This is a more convenient alternative to connecting directly to the
* #GdkFrameClock::update signal of #GdkFrameClock, since you don't
* have to worry about when a #GdkFrameClock is assigned to a widget.
* @param callback function to call for updating animations
* @returns an id for the connection of this callback. Remove the callback by passing it to gtk_widget_remove_tick_callback()
*/
add_tick_callback(callback: Gtk.TickCallback): number;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
* @returns %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
*/
can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're
* writing an app, you’d use gtk_widget_grab_focus() to move the focus
* to a particular widget, and gtk_container_set_focus_chain() to
* change the focus tab order. So you may want to investigate those
* functions instead.
*
* gtk_widget_child_focus() is called by containers as the user moves
* around the window using keyboard shortcuts. `direction` indicates
* what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab
* forward, tab backward). gtk_widget_child_focus() emits the
* #GtkWidget::focus signal; widgets override the default handler
* for this signal in order to implement appropriate focus behavior.
*
* The default ::focus handler for a widget should return %TRUE if
* moving in `direction` left the focus on a focusable location inside
* that widget, and %FALSE if moving in `direction` moved the focus
* outside the widget. If returning %TRUE, widgets normally
* call gtk_widget_grab_focus() to place the focus accordingly;
* if returning %FALSE, they don’t modify the current focus location.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if focus ended up inside @widget
*/
child_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
child_notify(child_property: string): void;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget’s type,
* never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
*/
class_path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this widget extra space
* when possible. Containers should check this, rather than
* looking at gtk_widget_get_hexpand() or gtk_widget_get_vexpand().
*
* This function already checks whether the widget is visible, so
* visibility does not need to be checked separately. Non-visible
* widgets are not expanded.
*
* The computed expand value uses either the expand setting explicitly
* set on the widget itself, or, if none has been explicitly set,
* the widget may expand if some of its children do.
* @param orientation expand direction
* @returns whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded
*/
compute_expand(orientation: Gtk.Orientation | null): boolean;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoContext with the appropriate font map,
* font options, font description, and base direction for drawing
* text for this widget. See also gtk_widget_get_pango_context().
* @returns the new #PangoContext
*/
create_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
* font description, and base direction for drawing text for
* this widget.
*
* If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, you need
* to re-create it when the widget #PangoContext is replaced.
* This can be tracked by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal
* on the widget.
* @param text text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
* @returns the new #PangoLayout
*/
create_pango_layout(text?: string | null): Pango.Layout;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
destroy(): void;
/**
* This function sets *`widget_pointer` to %NULL if `widget_pointer` !=
* %NULL. It’s intended to be used as a callback connected to the
* “destroy” signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
* as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
* as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
* be set to %NULL. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies
* of the same dialog.
* @param widget_pointer address of a variable that contains @widget
*/
destroyed(widget_pointer: Gtk.Widget): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `device` has been shadowed by a GTK+
* device grab on another widget, so it would stop sending
* events to `widget`. This may be used in the
* #GtkWidget::grab-notify signal to check for specific
* devices. See gtk_device_grab_add().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE if there is an ongoing grab on @device by another #GtkWidget than @widget.
*/
device_is_shadowed(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* This function is equivalent to gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates(),
* passing -1, -1 as coordinates.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event?: Gdk.Event | null,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Initiates a drag on the source side. The function only needs to be used
* when the application is starting drags itself, and is not needed when
* gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
*
* The `event` is used to retrieve the timestamp that will be used internally to
* grab the pointer. If `event` is %NULL, then %GDK_CURRENT_TIME will be used.
* However, you should try to pass a real event in all cases, since that can be
* used to get information about the drag.
*
* Generally there are three cases when you want to start a drag by hand by
* calling this function:
*
* 1. During a #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* immediately when the user presses the mouse button. Pass the `event`
* that you have in your #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler.
*
* 2. During a #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* when the mouse moves past a certain threshold distance after a button-press.
* Pass the `event` that you have in your #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler.
*
* 3. During a timeout handler, if you want to start a drag after the mouse
* button is held down for some time. Try to save the last event that you got
* from the mouse, using gdk_event_copy(), and pass it to this function
* (remember to free the event with gdk_event_free() when you are done).
* If you really cannot pass a real event, pass %NULL instead.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @param x The initial x coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @param y The initial y coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin_with_coordinates(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event: Gdk.Event | null,
x: number,
y: number,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Checks to see if a mouse drag starting at (`start_x,` `start_y)` and ending
* at (`current_x,` `current_y)` has passed the GTK+ drag threshold, and thus
* should trigger the beginning of a drag-and-drop operation.
* @param start_x X coordinate of start of drag
* @param start_y Y coordinate of start of drag
* @param current_x current X coordinate
* @param current_y current Y coordinate
* @returns %TRUE if the drag threshold has been passed.
*/
drag_check_threshold(start_x: number, start_y: number, current_x: number, current_y: number): boolean;
/**
* Add the image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Looks for a match between the supported targets of `context` and the
* `dest_target_list,` returning the first matching target, otherwise
* returning %GDK_NONE. `dest_target_list` should usually be the return
* value from gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list(), but some widgets may
* have different valid targets for different parts of the widget; in
* that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
* passes the correct target list to this function.
* @param context drag context
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (@widget).
* @returns first target that the source offers and the dest can accept, or %GDK_NONE
*/
drag_dest_find_target(context: Gdk.DragContext, target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): Gdk.Atom;
/**
* Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_dest_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
* emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion signals.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget always emits #GtkWidget::drag-motion events
*/
drag_dest_get_track_motion(): boolean;
/**
* Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
*
* The default behaviors listed in `flags` have an effect similar
* to installing default handlers for the widget’s drag-and-drop signals
* (#GtkWidget::drag-motion, #GtkWidget::drag-drop, ...). They all exist
* for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
* sufficient to connect to the widget’s #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
* signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
*
* Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
* as described in the documentation for #GtkWidget::drag-motion. The default
* behaviors described by `flags` make some assumptions, that can conflict
* with your own signal handlers. For instance #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP causes
* invokations of gdk_drag_status() in the context of #GtkWidget::drag-motion,
* and invokations of gtk_drag_finish() in #GtkWidget::drag-data-received.
* Especially the later is dramatic, when your own #GtkWidget::drag-motion
* handler calls gtk_drag_get_data() to inspect the dragged data.
*
* There’s no way to set a default action here, you can use the
* #GtkWidget::drag-motion callback for that. Here’s an example which selects
* the action to use depending on whether the control key is pressed or not:
*
* ```c
* static void
* drag_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
* GdkDragContext *context,
* gint x,
* gint y,
* guint time)
* {
* GdkModifierType mask;
*
* gdk_window_get_pointer (gtk_widget_get_window (widget),
* NULL, NULL, &mask);
* if (mask & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_COPY, time);
* else
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_MOVE, time);
* }
* ```
*
* @param flags which types of default drag behavior to use
* @param targets a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntrys indicating the drop types that this @widget will accept, or %NULL. Later you can access the list with gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list() and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
* @param actions a bitmask of possible actions for a drop onto this @widget.
*/
drag_dest_set(
flags: Gtk.DestDefaults | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets this widget as a proxy for drops to another window.
* @param proxy_window the window to which to forward drag events
* @param protocol the drag protocol which the @proxy_window accepts (You can use gdk_drag_get_protocol() to determine this)
* @param use_coordinates If %TRUE, send the same coordinates to the destination, because it is an embedded subwindow.
*/
drag_dest_set_proxy(
proxy_window: Gdk.Window,
protocol: Gdk.DragProtocol | null,
use_coordinates: boolean,
): void;
/**
* Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
* gtk_drag_dest_set().
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_dest_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Tells the widget to emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion and
* #GtkWidget::drag-leave events regardless of the targets and the
* %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION flag.
*
* This may be used when a widget wants to do generic
* actions regardless of the targets that the source offers.
* @param track_motion whether to accept all targets
*/
drag_dest_set_track_motion(track_motion: boolean): void;
/**
* Clears information about a drop destination set with
* gtk_drag_dest_set(). The widget will no longer receive
* notification of drags.
*/
drag_dest_unset(): void;
/**
* Gets the data associated with a drag. When the data
* is received or the retrieval fails, GTK+ will emit a
* #GtkWidget::drag-data-received signal. Failure of the retrieval
* is indicated by the length field of the `selection_data`
* signal parameter being negative. However, when gtk_drag_get_data()
* is called implicitely because the %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP was set,
* then the widget will not receive notification of failed
* drops.
* @param context the drag context
* @param target the target (form of the data) to retrieve
* @param time_ a timestamp for retrieving the data. This will generally be the time received in a #GtkWidget::drag-motion or #GtkWidget::drag-drop signal
*/
drag_get_data(context: Gdk.DragContext, target: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): void;
/**
* Highlights a widget as a currently hovered drop target.
* To end the highlight, call gtk_drag_unhighlight().
* GTK+ calls this automatically if %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT is set.
*/
drag_highlight(): void;
/**
* Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_source_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Sets up a widget so that GTK+ will start a drag operation when the user
* clicks and drags on the widget. The widget must have a window.
* @param start_button_mask the bitmask of buttons that can start the drag
* @param targets the table of targets that the drag will support, may be %NULL
* @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget
*/
drag_source_set(
start_button_mask: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to `icon`. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon A #GIcon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a themed icon. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon_name name of icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_name(icon_name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular widget
* from a #GdkPixbuf. GTK+ retains a reference for `pixbuf` and will
* release it when it is no longer needed.
* @param pixbuf the #GdkPixbuf for the drag icon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a stock icon.
* @param stock_id the ID of the stock icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_stock(stock_id: string): void;
/**
* Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag source with
* gtk_drag_source_set().
* @param target_list list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_source_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Undoes the effects of gtk_drag_source_set().
*/
drag_source_unset(): void;
/**
* Removes a highlight set by gtk_drag_highlight() from
* a widget.
*/
drag_unhighlight(): void;
/**
* Draws `widget` to `cr`. The top left corner of the widget will be
* drawn to the currently set origin point of `cr`.
*
* You should pass a cairo context as `cr` argument that is in an
* original state. Otherwise the resulting drawing is undefined. For
* example changing the operator using cairo_set_operator() or the
* line width using cairo_set_line_width() might have unwanted side
* effects.
* You may however change the context’s transform matrix - like with
* cairo_scale(), cairo_translate() or cairo_set_matrix() and clip
* region with cairo_clip() prior to calling this function. Also, it
* is fine to modify the context with cairo_save() and
* cairo_push_group() prior to calling this function.
*
* Note that special-purpose widgets may contain special code for
* rendering to the screen and might appear differently on screen
* and when rendered using gtk_widget_draw().
* @param cr a cairo context to draw to
*/
draw(cr: cairo.Context): void;
/**
* Ensures that `widget` has a style (`widget->`style).
*
* Not a very useful function; most of the time, if you
* want the style, the widget is realized, and realized
* widgets are guaranteed to have a style already.
*/
ensure_style(): void;
/**
* Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
* If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
* gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
*
* Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
* ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
* or window manager that is used.
*/
error_bell(): void;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget`. The
* signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
*/
freeze_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
* @returns the #AtkObject associated with @widget
*/
get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves the #GActionGroup that was registered using `prefix`. The resulting
* #GActionGroup may have been registered to `widget` or any #GtkWidget in its
* ancestry.
*
* If no action group was found matching `prefix,` then %NULL is returned.
* @param prefix The “prefix” of the action group.
* @returns A #GActionGroup or %NULL.
*/
get_action_group(prefix: string): Gio.ActionGroup | null;
/**
* Returns the baseline that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function, and when allocating child
* widgets in #GtkWidget::size_allocate.
* @returns the baseline of the @widget, or -1 if none
*/
get_allocated_baseline(): number;
/**
* Returns the height that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the height of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_height(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocated size.
*
* This function returns the last values passed to
* gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline(). The value differs from
* the size returned in gtk_widget_get_allocation() in that functions
* like gtk_widget_set_halign() can adjust the allocation, but not
* the value returned by this function.
*
* If a widget is not visible, its allocated size is 0.
*/
get_allocated_size(): [Gtk.Allocation, number];
/**
* Returns the width that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the width of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_width(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocation.
*
* Note, when implementing a #GtkContainer: a widget’s allocation will
* be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget’s parent
* container typically calls gtk_widget_size_allocate() with an
* allocation, and that allocation is then adjusted (to handle margin
* and alignment for example) before assignment to the widget.
* gtk_widget_get_allocation() returns the adjusted allocation that
* was actually assigned to the widget. The adjusted allocation is
* guaranteed to be completely contained within the
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() allocation, however. So a #GtkContainer
* is guaranteed that its children stay inside the assigned bounds,
* but not that they have exactly the bounds the container assigned.
* There is no way to get the original allocation assigned by
* gtk_widget_size_allocate(), since it isn’t stored; if a container
* implementation needs that information it will have to track it itself.
*/
get_allocation(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Gets the first ancestor of `widget` with type `widget_type`. For example,
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)` gets
* the first #GtkBox that’s an ancestor of `widget`. No reference will be
* added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
* about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
*
* Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
* considers `widget` to be an ancestor of itself.
* @param widget_type ancestor type
* @returns the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
*/
get_ancestor(widget_type: GObject.GType): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
*/
get_app_paintable(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_default(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_focus(): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Obtains
* `widget->`requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
* geometry on the widget (e.g. with gtk_widget_set_size_request()),
* in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
* requisition.
*
* This function differs from gtk_widget_size_request() in that
* it retrieves the last size request value from `widget->`requisition,
* while gtk_widget_size_request() actually calls the "size_request" method
* on `widget` to compute the size request and fill in `widget->`requisition,
* and only then returns `widget->`requisition.
*
* Because this function does not call the “size_request” method, it
* can only be used when you know that `widget->`requisition is
* up-to-date, that is, gtk_widget_size_request() has been called
* since the last time a resize was queued. In general, only container
* implementations have this information; applications should use
* gtk_widget_size_request().
*/
get_child_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
* If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
* needs reorganization.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
*/
get_child_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s clip area.
*
* The clip area is the area in which all of `widget'`s drawing will
* happen. Other toolkits call it the bounding box.
*
* Historically, in GTK+ the clip area has been equal to the allocation
* retrieved via gtk_widget_get_allocation().
*/
get_clip(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
* be used with `widget`. `widget` must have a #GdkDisplay
* associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
* window.
* @param selection a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the default clipboard. Another common value is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives the primary X selection.
* @returns the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard already exists, a new one will be created. Once a clipboard object has been created, it is persistent for all time.
*/
get_clipboard(selection: Gdk.Atom): Gtk.Clipboard;
/**
* Obtains the composite name of a widget.
* @returns the composite name of @widget, or %NULL if @widget is not a composite child. The string should be freed when it is no longer needed.
*/
get_composite_name(): string;
/**
* Returns whether `device` can interact with `widget` and its
* children. See gtk_widget_set_device_enabled().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE is @device is enabled for @widget
*/
get_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
* are the events that the widget will receive when `device` operates on it.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns device event mask for @widget
*/
get_device_events(device: Gdk.Device): Gdk.EventMask;
/**
* Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_direction().
* @returns the reading direction for the widget.
*/
get_direction(): Gtk.TextDirection;
/**
* Get the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create display specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_display(): Gdk.Display;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is double buffered.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
*/
get_double_buffered(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for the widget. These are the
* events that the widget will receive.
*
* Note: Internally, the widget event mask will be the logical OR of the event
* mask set through gtk_widget_set_events() or gtk_widget_add_events(), and the
* event mask necessary to cater for every #GtkEventController created for the
* widget.
* @returns event mask for @widget
*/
get_events(): number;
/**
* Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* See gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*/
get_focus_on_click(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the font map that has been set with gtk_widget_set_font_map().
* @returns A #PangoFontMap, or %NULL
*/
get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;
/**
* Returns the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering. When not set,
* the defaults font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @returns the #cairo_font_options_t or %NULL if not set
*/
get_font_options(): cairo.FontOptions | null;
/**
* Obtains the frame clock for a widget. The frame clock is a global
* “ticker” that can be used to drive animations and repaints. The
* most common reason to get the frame clock is to call
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), in order to get a time to use for
* animating. For example you might record the start of the animation
* with an initial value from gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), and
* then update the animation by calling
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() again during each repaint.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_request_phase() will result in a new frame on the
* clock, but won’t necessarily repaint any widgets. To repaint a
* widget, you have to use gtk_widget_queue_draw() which invalidates
* the widget (thus scheduling it to receive a draw on the next
* frame). gtk_widget_queue_draw() will also end up requesting a frame
* on the appropriate frame clock.
*
* A widget’s frame clock will not change while the widget is
* mapped. Reparenting a widget (which implies a temporary unmap) can
* change the widget’s frame clock.
*
* Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.
* @returns a #GdkFrameClock, or %NULL if widget is unrealized
*/
get_frame_clock(): Gdk.FrameClock | null;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:halign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. Baselines are not supported for horizontal
* alignment.
* @returns the horizontal alignment of @widget
*/
get_halign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @returns current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
*/
get_has_tooltip(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
* gtk_widget_set_has_window().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_has_window(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Containers should use gtk_widget_compute_expand() rather than
* this function, to see whether a widget, or any of its children,
* has the expand flag set. If any child of a widget wants to
* expand, the parent may ask to expand also.
*
* This function only looks at the widget’s own hexpand flag, rather
* than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget
* wants to expand.
* @returns whether hexpand flag is set
*/
get_hexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_hexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @returns whether hexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_hexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is mapped.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
get_mapped(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @returns The bottom margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_bottom(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @returns The end margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_end(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @returns The left margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_left(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @returns The right margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_right(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @returns The start margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_start(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @returns The top margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_top(): number;
/**
* Returns the modifier mask the `widget’`s windowing system backend
* uses for a particular purpose.
*
* See gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask().
* @param intent the use case for the modifier mask
* @returns the modifier mask used for @intent.
*/
get_modifier_mask(intent: Gdk.ModifierIntent | null): Gdk.ModifierType;
/**
* Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
* gtk_widget_modify_style().) If no style has previously set, a new
* #GtkRcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the
* modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
* style, you must call gtk_widget_modify_style(), passing in the
* returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
*
* Caution: passing the style back to gtk_widget_modify_style() will
* normally end up destroying it, because gtk_widget_modify_style() copies
* the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
* thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
* to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
* @returns the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
*/
get_modifier_style(): Gtk.RcStyle;
/**
* Retrieves the name of a widget. See gtk_widget_set_name() for the
* significance of widget names.
* @returns name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed
*/
get_name(): string;
/**
* Returns the current value of the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
* which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all()
* will affect this widget.
* @returns the current value of the “no-show-all” property.
*/
get_no_show_all(): boolean;
/**
* Fetches the requested opacity for this widget.
* See gtk_widget_set_opacity().
* @returns the requested opacity for this widget.
*/
get_opacity(): number;
/**
* Gets a #PangoContext with the appropriate font map, font description,
* and base direction for this widget. Unlike the context returned
* by gtk_widget_create_pango_context(), this context is owned by
* the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes
* or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to
* match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked
* by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal on the widget.
* @returns the #PangoContext for the widget.
*/
get_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Returns the parent container of `widget`.
* @returns the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
*/
get_parent(): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Gets `widget’`s parent window, or %NULL if it does not have one.
* @returns the parent window of @widget, or %NULL if it does not have a parent window.
*/
get_parent_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWidgetPath representing `widget,` if the widget
* is not connected to a toplevel widget, a partial path will be
* created.
* @returns The #GtkWidgetPath representing @widget
*/
get_path(): Gtk.WidgetPath;
/**
* Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(); and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*/
get_pointer(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget, taking
* into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
*
* This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
* not impose any restrictions on the child placement. It can be used
* to deduce toplevel window and menu sizes as well as child widgets in
* free-form containers such as GtkLayout.
*
* Handle with care. Note that the natural height of a height-for-width
* widget will generally be a smaller size than the minimum height, since the required
* height for the natural width is generally smaller than the required height for
* the minimum width.
*
* Use gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width() if you want to support
* baseline alignment.
*/
get_preferred_size(): [Gtk.Requisition | null, Gtk.Requisition | null];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is realized.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is realized, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_realized(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is always treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_receives_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget acts as the default widget when focused, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_receives_default(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
* @returns The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by @widget.
*/
get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s requisition.
*
* This function should only be used by widget implementations in
* order to figure whether the widget’s requisition has actually
* changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
* gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
*
* Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
*/
get_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
* only be called after the widget has been added to a widget
* hierarchy with #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup
* #GdkWindow associated with the window. In general, you should only
* create display specific resources when a widget has been realized,
* and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_root_window(): Gdk.Window;
/**
* Retrieves the internal scale factor that maps from window coordinates
* to the actual device pixels. On traditional systems this is 1, on
* high density outputs, it can be a higher value (typically 2).
*
* See gdk_window_get_scale_factor().
* @returns the scale factor for @widget
*/
get_scale_factor(): number;
/**
* Get the #GdkScreen from the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow
* at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create screen specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;
/**
* Returns the widget’s sensitivity (in the sense of returning
* the value that has been set using gtk_widget_set_sensitive()).
*
* The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
* own and its parent widget’s sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
*/
get_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the settings object holding the settings used for this widget.
*
* Note that this function can only be called when the #GtkWidget
* is attached to a toplevel, since the settings object is specific
* to a particular #GdkScreen.
* @returns the relevant #GtkSettings object
*/
get_settings(): Gtk.Settings;
/**
* Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in `width` or
* `height` indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
* and the natural requisition of the widget will be used instead. See
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
* actually request, call gtk_widget_get_preferred_size() instead of
* this function.
*/
get_size_request(): [number, number];
/**
* Returns the widget’s state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
* @returns the state of @widget.
*/
get_state(): Gtk.StateType;
/**
* Returns the widget state as a flag set. It is worth mentioning
* that the effective %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE state will be
* returned, that is, also based on parent insensitivity, even if
* `widget` itself is sensitive.
*
* Also note that if you are looking for a way to obtain the
* #GtkStateFlags to pass to a #GtkStyleContext method, you
* should look at gtk_style_context_get_state().
* @returns The state flags for widget
*/
get_state_flags(): Gtk.StateFlags;
/**
* Simply an accessor function that returns `widget->`style.
* @returns the widget’s #GtkStyle
*/
get_style(): Gtk.Style;
/**
* Returns the style context associated to `widget`. The returned object is
* guaranteed to be the same for the lifetime of `widget`.
* @returns a #GtkStyleContext. This memory is owned by @widget and must not be freed.
*/
get_style_context(): Gtk.StyleContext;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `widget` is multiple pointer aware. See
* gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice() for more information.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is multidevice aware.
*/
get_support_multidevice(): boolean;
/**
* Fetch an object build from the template XML for `widget_type` in this `widget` instance.
*
* This will only report children which were previously declared with
* gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_full() or one of its
* variants.
*
* This function is only meant to be called for code which is private to the `widget_type` which
* declared the child and is meant for language bindings which cannot easily make use
* of the GObject structure offsets.
* @param widget_type The #GType to get a template child for
* @param name The “id” of the child defined in the template XML
* @returns The object built in the template XML with the id @name
*/
get_template_child(widget_type: GObject.GType, name: string): T;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_markup(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_text(): string | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWindow of the current tooltip. This can be the
* GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set
* using gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window().
* @returns The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
*/
get_tooltip_window(): Gtk.Window;
/**
* This function returns the topmost widget in the container hierarchy
* `widget` is a part of. If `widget` has no parent widgets, it will be
* returned as the topmost widget. No reference will be added to the
* returned widget; it should not be unreferenced.
*
* Note the difference in behavior vs. gtk_widget_get_ancestor();
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW)`
* would return
* %NULL if `widget` wasn’t inside a toplevel window, and if the
* window was inside a #GtkWindow-derived widget which was in turn
* inside the toplevel #GtkWindow. While the second case may
* seem unlikely, it actually happens when a #GtkPlug is embedded
* inside a #GtkSocket within the same application.
*
* To reliably find the toplevel #GtkWindow, use
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel() and call GTK_IS_WINDOW()
* on the result. For instance, to get the title of a widget's toplevel
* window, one might use:
*
* ```c
* static const char *
* get_widget_toplevel_title (GtkWidget *widget)
* {
* GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
* if (GTK_IS_WINDOW (toplevel))
* {
* return gtk_window_get_title (GTK_WINDOW (toplevel));
* }
*
* return NULL;
* }
* ```
*
* @returns the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself if there’s no ancestor.
*/
get_toplevel(): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. If your widget want to support baseline aligned
* children it must use gtk_widget_get_valign_with_baseline(), or
* `g_object_get (widget, "valign", &value, NULL)`, which will
* also report the true value.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget, ignoring baseline alignment
*/
get_valign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property, including
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget
*/
get_valign_with_baseline(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand flag is set
*/
get_vexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_vexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_vexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is visible. If you want to
* take into account whether the widget’s parent is also marked as
* visible, use gtk_widget_is_visible() instead.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_visible().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is visible
*/
get_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the visual that will be used to render `widget`.
* @returns the visual for @widget
*/
get_visual(): Gdk.Visual;
/**
* Returns the widget’s window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
* @returns @widget’s window.
*/
get_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Makes `widget` the current grabbed widget.
*
* This means that interaction with other widgets in the same
* application is blocked and mouse as well as keyboard events
* are delivered to this widget.
*
* If `widget` is not sensitive, it is not set as the current
* grabbed widget and this function does nothing.
*/
grab_add(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to become the default widget. `widget` must be able to be
* a default widget; typically you would ensure this yourself
* by calling gtk_widget_set_can_default() with a %TRUE value.
* The default widget is activated when
* the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
* activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them. Note
* that #GtkEntry widgets require the “activates-default” property
* set to %TRUE before they activate the default widget when Enter
* is pressed and the #GtkEntry is focused.
*/
grab_default(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Removes the grab from the given widget.
*
* You have to pair calls to gtk_grab_add() and gtk_grab_remove().
*
* If `widget` does not have the grab, this function does nothing.
*/
grab_remove(): void;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
* is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse).
*
* See also gtk_grab_add().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
*/
has_grab(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
has_rc_style(): boolean;
/**
* Checks whether there is a #GdkScreen is associated with
* this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated
* screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
* window at the top.
* @returns %TRUE if there is a #GdkScreen associated with the widget.
*/
has_screen(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget should show a visible indication that
* it has the global input focus. This is a convenience function for
* use in ::draw handlers that takes into account whether focus
* indication should currently be shown in the toplevel window of
* `widget`. See gtk_window_get_focus_visible() for more information
* about focus indication.
*
* To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use
* gtk_widget_has_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”
*/
has_visible_focus(): boolean;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
hide(): void;
/**
* Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
* signal on a #GtkWindow. The function calls gtk_widget_hide() on its
* argument, then returns %TRUE. If connected to ::delete-event, the
* result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the
* window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy
* the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
* is received.
* @returns %TRUE
*/
hide_on_delete(): boolean;
/**
* Returns whether the widget is currently being destroyed.
* This information can sometimes be used to avoid doing
* unnecessary work.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is being destroyed
*/
in_destruction(): boolean;
/**
* Creates and initializes child widgets defined in templates. This
* function must be called in the instance initializer for any
* class which assigned itself a template using gtk_widget_class_set_template()
*
* It is important to call this function in the instance initializer
* of a #GtkWidget subclass and not in #GObject.constructed() or
* #GObject.constructor() for two reasons.
*
* One reason is that generally derived widgets will assume that parent
* class composite widgets have been created in their instance
* initializers.
*
* Another reason is that when calling g_object_new() on a widget with
* composite templates, it’s important to build the composite widgets
* before the construct properties are set. Properties passed to g_object_new()
* should take precedence over properties set in the private template XML.
*/
init_template(): void;
/**
* Sets an input shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see
* gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region() for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
input_shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Inserts `group` into `widget`. Children of `widget` that implement
* #GtkActionable can then be associated with actions in `group` by
* setting their “action-name” to
* `prefix`.`action-name`.
*
* If `group` is %NULL, a previously inserted group for `name` is removed
* from `widget`.
* @param name the prefix for actions in @group
* @param group a #GActionGroup, or %NULL
*/
insert_action_group(name: string, group?: Gio.ActionGroup | null): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `area,` storing
* the intersection in `intersection,` and returns %TRUE if there was
* an intersection. `intersection` may be %NULL if you’re only
* interested in whether there was an intersection.
* @param area a rectangle
* @returns %TRUE if there was an intersection
*/
intersect(area: Gdk.Rectangle): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle | null];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is somewhere inside `ancestor,` possibly with
* intermediate containers.
* @param ancestor another #GtkWidget
* @returns %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child, grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
*/
is_ancestor(ancestor: Gtk.Widget): boolean;
/**
* Whether `widget` can rely on having its alpha channel
* drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
* compositing manager is running for `widget’`s screen.
*
* Please note that the semantics of this call will change
* in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
* window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
* @returns %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha channel being drawn correctly.
*/
is_composited(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn
* to if it is mapped and visible.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is drawable, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_drawable(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the widget’s effective sensitivity, which means
* it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
*/
is_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is a toplevel widget.
*
* Currently only #GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible (and out-of-process
* #GtkPlugs) are toplevel widgets. Toplevel widgets have no parent
* widget.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_toplevel(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget and all its parents are marked as
* visible.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See also gtk_widget_get_visible() and gtk_widget_set_visible()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget and all its parents are visible
*/
is_visible(): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, %FALSE if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
*/
keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Lists the closures used by `widget` for accelerator group connections
* with gtk_accel_group_connect_by_path() or gtk_accel_group_connect().
* The closures can be used to monitor accelerator changes on `widget,`
* by connecting to the `GtkAccelGroup:`:accel-changed signal of the
* #GtkAccelGroup of a closure which can be found out with
* gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure().
* @returns a newly allocated #GList of closures
*/
list_accel_closures(): GObject.Closure[];
/**
* Retrieves a %NULL-terminated array of strings containing the prefixes of
* #GActionGroup's available to `widget`.
* @returns a %NULL-terminated array of strings.
*/
list_action_prefixes(): string[];
/**
* Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
* which this widget is the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
* gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
*
* The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
* want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
* callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
* must call `g_list_foreach (result,
* (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and then unref all the
* widgets afterwards.
* @returns the list of mnemonic labels; free this list with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
*/
list_mnemonic_labels(): Gtk.Widget[];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
map(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
* @returns %TRUE if the signal has been handled
*/
mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Sets the base color for a widget in a particular state.
* All other style values are left untouched. The base color
* is the background color used along with the text color
* (see gtk_widget_modify_text()) for widgets such as #GtkEntry
* and #GtkTextView. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > base color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the base color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the base color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_base().
*/
modify_base(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > background color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the background color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
*/
modify_bg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the #GtkWidget
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param primary the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
* @param secondary the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
*/
modify_cursor(primary?: Gdk.Color | null, secondary?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the foreground color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the foreground color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
*/
modify_fg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font()
*/
modify_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Modifies style values on the widget.
*
* Modifications made using this technique take precedence over
* style values set via an RC file, however, they will be overridden
* if a style is explicitly set on the widget using gtk_widget_set_style().
* The #GtkRcStyle-struct is designed so each field can either be
* set or unset, so it is possible, using this function, to modify some
* style values and leave the others unchanged.
*
* Note that modifications made with this function are not cumulative
* with previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_style() or with such
* functions as gtk_widget_modify_fg(). If you wish to retain
* previous values, you must first call gtk_widget_get_modifier_style(),
* make your modifications to the returned style, then call
* gtk_widget_modify_style() with that style. On the other hand,
* if you first call gtk_widget_modify_style(), subsequent calls
* to such functions gtk_widget_modify_fg() will have a cumulative
* effect with the initial modifications.
* @param style the #GtkRcStyle-struct holding the style modifications
*/
modify_style(style: Gtk.RcStyle): void;
/**
* Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* The text color is the foreground color used along with the
* base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base()) for widgets such
* as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the text color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_text().
*/
modify_text(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_background_color()
*/
override_background_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
*
* This function does not act recursively. Setting the color of a
* container does not affect its children. Note that some widgets that
* you may not think of as containers, for instance #GtkButtons,
* are actually containers.
*
* This API is mostly meant as a quick way for applications to
* change a widget appearance. If you are developing a widgets
* library and intend this change to be themeable, it is better
* done by setting meaningful CSS classes in your
* widget/container implementation through gtk_style_context_add_class().
*
* This way, your widget library can install a #GtkCssProvider
* with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK priority in order
* to provide a default styling for those widgets that need so, and
* this theming may fully overridden by the user’s theme.
*
* Note that for complex widgets this may bring in undesired
* results (such as uniform background color everywhere), in
* these cases it is better to fully style such widgets through a
* #GtkCssProvider with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION
* priority.
* @param state the state for which to set the color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_color()
*/
override_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* Note that the underlying properties have the #GdkColor type,
* so the alpha value in `primary` and `secondary` will be ignored.
* @param cursor the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
* @param secondary_cursor the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
*/
override_cursor(cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null, secondary_cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are
* left untouched. See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_font()
*/
override_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color() for overriding the foreground
* or background color.
* @param name the name of the symbolic color to modify
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_symbolic_color()
*/
override_symbolic_color(name: string, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Obtains the full path to `widget`. The path is simply the name of a
* widget and all its parents in the container hierarchy, separated by
* periods. The name of a widget comes from
* gtk_widget_get_name(). Paths are used to apply styles to a widget
* in gtkrc configuration files. Widget names are the type of the
* widget by default (e.g. “GtkButton”) or can be set to an
* application-specific value with gtk_widget_set_name(). By setting
* the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply
* styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc
* file. `path_reversed_p` fills in the path in reverse order,
* i.e. starting with `widget’`s name instead of starting with the name
* of `widget’`s outermost ancestor.
*/
path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
*
* Flags the widget for a rerun of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* function. Use this function instead of gtk_widget_queue_resize()
* when the `widget'`s size request didn't change but it wants to
* reposition its contents.
*
* An example user of this function is gtk_widget_set_halign().
*/
queue_allocate(): void;
/**
* Mark `widget` as needing to recompute its expand flags. Call
* this function when setting legacy expand child properties
* on the child of a container.
*
* See gtk_widget_compute_expand().
*/
queue_compute_expand(): void;
/**
* Equivalent to calling gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() for the
* entire area of a widget.
*/
queue_draw(): void;
/**
* Convenience function that calls gtk_widget_queue_draw_region() on
* the region created from the given coordinates.
*
* The region here is specified in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(), and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*
* `width` or `height` may be 0, in this case this function does
* nothing. Negative values for `width` and `height` are not allowed.
* @param x x coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param y y coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param width width of region to draw
* @param height height of region to draw
*/
queue_draw_area(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
* be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
* For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
* queues a resize to ensure there’s enough space for the new text.
*
* Note that you cannot call gtk_widget_queue_resize() on a widget
* from inside its implementation of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* virtual method. Calls to gtk_widget_queue_resize() from inside
* GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate will be silently ignored.
*/
queue_resize(): void;
/**
* This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
* except that the widget is not invalidated.
*/
queue_resize_no_redraw(): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
realize(): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `region,` returning
* the intersection. The result may be empty, use cairo_region_is_empty() to
* check.
* @param region a #cairo_region_t, in the same coordinate system as @widget->allocation. That is, relative to @widget->window for widgets which return %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window(); relative to the parent window of @widget->window otherwise.
* @returns A newly allocated region holding the intersection of @widget and @region.
*/
region_intersect(region: cairo.Region): cairo.Region;
/**
* Registers a #GdkWindow with the widget and sets it up so that
* the widget receives events for it. Call gtk_widget_unregister_window()
* when destroying the window.
*
* Before 3.8 you needed to call gdk_window_set_user_data() directly to set
* this up. This is now deprecated and you should use gtk_widget_register_window()
* instead. Old code will keep working as is, although some new features like
* transparency might not work perfectly.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
register_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Removes an accelerator from `widget,` previously installed with
* gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @returns whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
*/
remove_accelerator(
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
): boolean;
/**
* Removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). The widget
* must have previously been added to the list with
* gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
* @param label a #GtkWidget that was previously set as a mnemonic label for @widget with gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
*/
remove_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Removes a tick callback previously registered with
* gtk_widget_add_tick_callback().
* @param id an id returned by gtk_widget_add_tick_callback()
*/
remove_tick_callback(id: number): void;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme settings for `widget`
* to look up `stock_id` and render it to a pixbuf. `stock_id` should
* be a stock icon ID such as #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size`
* should be a size such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. `detail` should be a
* string that identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so
* that theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or
* code.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be
* freed after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @param detail render detail to pass to theme engine
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon(stock_id: string, size: number, detail?: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme engine and style
* settings for `widget` to look up `stock_id` and render it to
* a pixbuf. `stock_id` should be a stock icon ID such as
* #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size` should be a size
* such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
* after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon_pixbuf(stock_id: string, size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* Moves a widget from one #GtkContainer to another, handling reference
* count issues to avoid destroying the widget.
* @param new_parent a #GtkContainer to move the widget into
*/
reparent(new_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Reset the styles of `widget` and all descendents, so when
* they are looked up again, they get the correct values
* for the currently loaded RC file settings.
*
* This function is not useful for applications.
*/
reset_rc_styles(): void;
/**
* Updates the style context of `widget` and all descendants
* by updating its widget path. #GtkContainers may want
* to use this on a child when reordering it in a way that a different
* style might apply to it. See also gtk_container_get_path_for_child().
*/
reset_style(): void;
/**
* Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* an expose event on a widget. This function is not normally used
* directly. The only time it is used is when propagating an expose
* event to a windowless child widget (gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE),
* and that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_draw().
*
* If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
* To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
* with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
* @param event a expose #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
send_expose(event: Gdk.Event): number;
/**
* Sends the focus change `event` to `widget`
*
* This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
* should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
* to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
* it’s not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
* window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
*
* An example of its usage is:
*
*
* ```c
* GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
*
* fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
* fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
* fevent->focus_change.window = _gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
* if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
* g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
*
* gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
*
* gdk_event_free (event);
* ```
*
* @param event a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
* @returns the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
*/
send_focus_change(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Given an accelerator group, `accel_group,` and an accelerator path,
* `accel_path,` sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
* key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
* will be activated. This removes any accelerators (for any
* accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
* gtk_widget_set_accel_path(). Associating accelerators with
* paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
* to be saved for future use. (See gtk_accel_map_save().)
*
* This function is a low level function that would most likely
* be used by a menu creation system like #GtkUIManager. If you
* use #GtkUIManager, setting up accelerator paths will be done
* automatically.
*
* Even when you you aren’t using #GtkUIManager, if you only want to
* set up accelerators on menu items gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()
* provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
*
* Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
* pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
* g_intern_static_string().
* @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
* @param accel_group a #GtkAccelGroup.
*/
set_accel_path(accel_path?: string | null, accel_group?: Gtk.AccelGroup | null): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s allocation. This should not be used
* directly, but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
*
* The allocation set should be the “adjusted” or actual
* allocation. If you’re implementing a #GtkContainer, you want to use
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() instead of gtk_widget_set_allocation().
* The GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_allocation virtual method adjusts the
* allocation inside gtk_widget_size_allocate() to create an adjusted
* allocation.
* @param allocation a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_allocation(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* This is a hint to the widget and does not affect the behavior of
* the GTK+ core; many widgets ignore this flag entirely. For widgets
* that do pay attention to the flag, such as #GtkEventBox and #GtkWindow,
* the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's
* background. (Children of the widget will still be drawn.) The application
* is then entirely responsible for drawing the widget background.
*
* Note that the background is still drawn when the widget is mapped.
* @param app_paintable %TRUE if the application will paint on the widget
*/
set_app_paintable(app_paintable: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param can_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_can_default(can_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
* widget.
* @param can_focus whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
*/
set_can_focus(can_focus: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether `widget` should be mapped along with its when its parent
* is mapped and `widget` has been shown with gtk_widget_show().
*
* The child visibility can be set for widget before it is added to
* a container with gtk_widget_set_parent(), to avoid mapping
* children unnecessary before immediately unmapping them. However
* it will be reset to its default state of %TRUE when the widget
* is removed from a container.
*
* Note that changing the child visibility of a widget does not
* queue a resize on the widget. Most of the time, the size of
* a widget is computed from all visible children, whether or
* not they are mapped. If this is not the case, the container
* can queue a resize itself.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @param is_visible if %TRUE, @widget should be mapped along with its parent.
*/
set_child_visible(is_visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s clip. This must not be used directly,
* but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
* It must be called after gtk_widget_set_allocation() (or after chaining up
* to the parent class), because that function resets the clip.
*
* The clip set should be the area that `widget` draws on. If `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, the area must contain all children's clips.
*
* If this function is not called by `widget` during a ::size-allocate handler,
* the clip will be set to `widget'`s allocation.
* @param clip a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_clip(clip: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets a widgets composite name. The widget must be
* a composite child of its parent; see gtk_widget_push_composite_child().
* @param name the name to set
*/
set_composite_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Enables or disables a #GdkDevice to interact with `widget`
* and all its children.
*
* It does so by descending through the #GdkWindow hierarchy
* and enabling the same mask that is has for core events
* (i.e. the one that gdk_window_get_events() returns).
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param enabled whether to enable the device
*/
set_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device, enabled: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive from `device`. Keep
* in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with windowless widgets (which return
* %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window());
* to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
* and receive events on the event box.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events event mask
*/
set_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
* controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
* and also the direction in which the children of a container are
* packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
* so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
* reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
* let the default reading direction present, except for containers
* where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitly
* visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
*
* If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
* set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
* @param dir the new direction
*/
set_direction(dir: Gtk.TextDirection | null): void;
/**
* Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
* to turn off the buffering. “Double buffered” simply means that
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() are called
* automatically around expose events sent to the
* widget. gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() diverts all drawing to a widget's
* window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() draws the
* buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
* update in one smooth step, and don’t see individual graphics
* primitives being rendered.
*
* In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don’t flicker,
* so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
* if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
*
* Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
* expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
* pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame()).
*
* In 3.10 GTK and GDK have been restructured for translucent drawing. Since
* then expose events for double-buffered widgets are culled into a single
* event to the toplevel GDK window. If you now unset double buffering, you
* will cause a separate rendering pass for every widget. This will likely
* cause rendering problems - in particular related to stacking - and usually
* increases rendering times significantly.
* @param double_buffered %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
*/
set_double_buffered(double_buffered: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind
* that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with widgets that have no window.
* (See gtk_widget_get_has_window()). To get events on those widgets,
* place them inside a #GtkEventBox and receive events on the event
* box.
* @param events event mask
*/
set_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
* you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
* application.
* @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
*/
set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the font map to use for Pango rendering. When not set, the widget
* will inherit the font map from its parent.
* @param font_map a #PangoFontMap, or %NULL to unset any previously set font map
*/
set_font_map(font_map?: Pango.FontMap | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering in this widget.
* When not set, the default font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @param options a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any previously set default font options.
*/
set_font_options(options?: cairo.FontOptions | null): void;
/**
* Sets the horizontal alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:halign property.
* @param align the horizontal alignment
*/
set_halign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets the has-tooltip property on `widget` to `has_tooltip`. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @param has_tooltip whether or not @widget has a tooltip.
*/
set_has_tooltip(has_tooltip: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
* all realized widgets have a non-%NULL “window” pointer
* (gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
* is realized), but for many of them it’s actually the #GdkWindow of
* one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
* themselves in #GtkWidget::realize must announce this by
* calling this function with `has_window` = %FALSE.
*
* This function should only be called by widget implementations,
* and they should call it in their init() function.
* @param has_window whether or not @widget has a window.
*/
set_has_window(has_window: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Call this function to set the expand flag if you would like your
* widget to become larger horizontally when the window has extra
* room.
*
* By default, widgets automatically expand if any of their children
* want to expand. (To see if a widget will automatically expand given
* its current children and state, call gtk_widget_compute_expand(). A
* container can decide how the expandability of children affects the
* expansion of the container by overriding the compute_expand virtual
* method on #GtkWidget.).
*
* Setting hexpand explicitly with this function will override the
* automatic expand behavior.
*
* This function forces the widget to expand or not to expand,
* regardless of children. The override occurs because
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() sets the hexpand-set property (see
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()) which causes the widget’s hexpand
* value to be used, rather than looking at children and widget state.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_hexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the hexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_hexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* The hexpand-set property will be set automatically when you call
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() to set hexpand, so the most likely
* reason to use this function would be to unset an explicit expand
* flag.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @param set value for hexpand-set property
*/
set_hexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being mapped.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “map” or “unmap” implementation.
* @param mapped %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
*/
set_mapped(mapped: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the bottom margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @param margin the bottom margin
*/
set_margin_bottom(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the end margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @param margin the end margin
*/
set_margin_end(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the left margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @param margin the left margin
*/
set_margin_left(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the right margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @param margin the right margin
*/
set_margin_right(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the start margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @param margin the start margin
*/
set_margin_start(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the top margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @param margin the top margin
*/
set_margin_top(margin: number): void;
/**
* Widgets can be named, which allows you to refer to them from a
* CSS file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name
* in the CSS file. See the documentation for the CSS syntax (on the
* same page as the docs for #GtkStyleContext).
*
* Note that the CSS syntax has certain special characters to delimit
* and represent elements in a selector (period, #, >, *...), so using
* these will make your widget impossible to match by name. Any combination
* of alphanumeric symbols, dashes and underscores will suffice.
* @param name name for the widget
*/
set_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property, which determines whether
* calls to gtk_widget_show_all() will affect this widget.
*
* This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally
* controlled visibility, see #GtkUIManager.
* @param no_show_all the new value for the “no-show-all” property
*/
set_no_show_all(no_show_all: boolean): void;
/**
* Request the `widget` to be rendered partially transparent,
* with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Opacity values
* are clamped to the [0,1] range.).
* This works on both toplevel widget, and child widgets, although there
* are some limitations:
*
* For toplevel widgets this depends on the capabilities of the windowing
* system. On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
* running. See gtk_widget_is_composited(). On Windows it should work
* always, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
* shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
*
* For child widgets it doesn’t work if any affected widget has a native window, or
* disables double buffering.
* @param opacity desired opacity, between 0 and 1
*/
set_opacity(opacity: number): void;
/**
* This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
* #GtkContainer.
* Sets the container as the parent of `widget,` and takes care of
* some details such as updating the state and style of the child
* to reflect its new location. The opposite function is
* gtk_widget_unparent().
* @param parent parent container
*/
set_parent(parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Sets a non default parent window for `widget`.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, setting a `parent_window` effects whether
* the window is a toplevel window or can be embedded into other
* widgets.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, this needs to be called before the
* window is realized.
* @param parent_window the new parent window.
*/
set_parent_window(parent_window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being realized. This function must only be
* called after all #GdkWindows for the `widget` have been created
* and registered.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “realize” or “unrealize” implementation.
* @param realized %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
*/
set_realized(realized: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` will be treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param receives_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_receives_default(receives_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
* allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
* the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
* leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
* setting off will improve performance.
*
* Note that for widgets where gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE
* setting this flag to %FALSE turns off all allocation on resizing:
* the widget will not even redraw if its position changes; this is to
* allow containers that don’t draw anything to avoid excess
* invalidations. If you set this flag on a widget with no window that
* does draw on `widget->`window, you are
* responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation of the
* widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
* regions newly when the widget increases size.
* @param redraw_on_allocate if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
*/
set_redraw_on_allocate(redraw_on_allocate: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
* can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are “grayed out” and the
* user can’t interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
* “inactive”, “disabled”, or “ghosted” in some other toolkits.
* @param sensitive %TRUE to make the widget sensitive
*/
set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget’s size
* request will be at least `width` by `height`. You can use this
* function to force a widget to be larger than it normally would be.
*
* In most cases, gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for
* toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will
* still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request
* will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size
* request. When dealing with window sizes,
* gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful function as well.
*
* Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
* translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
* can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
* basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
* correct.
*
* The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can
* accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly.
* However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than
* its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more
* space than it requested.
*
* If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then
* the “natural” size request of the widget will be used instead.
*
* The size request set here does not include any margin from the
* #GtkWidget properties margin-left, margin-right, margin-top, and
* margin-bottom, but it does include pretty much all other padding
* or border properties set by any subclass of #GtkWidget.
* @param width width @widget should request, or -1 to unset
* @param height height @widget should request, or -1 to unset
*/
set_size_request(width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
* of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
* the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
* @param state new state for @widget
*/
set_state(state: Gtk.StateType | null): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns on flag
* values in the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
*
* This function accepts the values %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_LTR and
* %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_RTL but ignores them. If you want to set the widget's
* direction, use gtk_widget_set_direction().
*
* It is worth mentioning that any other state than %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE,
* will be propagated down to all non-internal children if `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, while %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE itself will be propagated
* down to all #GtkContainer children by different means than turning on the
* state flag down the hierarchy, both gtk_widget_get_state_flags() and
* gtk_widget_is_sensitive() will make use of these.
* @param flags State flags to turn on
* @param clear Whether to clear state before turning on @flags
*/
set_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null, clear: boolean): void;
/**
* Used to set the #GtkStyle for a widget (`widget->`style). Since
* GTK 3, this function does nothing, the passed in style is ignored.
* @param style a #GtkStyle, or %NULL to remove the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
*/
set_style(style?: Gtk.Style | null): void;
/**
* Enables or disables multiple pointer awareness. If this setting is %TRUE,
* `widget` will start receiving multiple, per device enter/leave events. Note
* that if custom #GdkWindows are created in #GtkWidget::realize,
* gdk_window_set_support_multidevice() will have to be called manually on them.
* @param support_multidevice %TRUE to support input from multiple devices.
*/
set_support_multidevice(support_multidevice: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
* the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
*
* This function will take care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE
* and of the default handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup property and
* gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
* @param markup the contents of the tooltip for @widget, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_markup(markup?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
* care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE and of the default
* handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-text property and gtk_tooltip_set_text().
* @param text the contents of the tooltip for @widget
*/
set_tooltip_text(text?: string | null): void;
/**
* Replaces the default window used for displaying
* tooltips with `custom_window`. GTK+ will take care of showing and
* hiding `custom_window` at the right moment, to behave likewise as
* the default tooltip window. If `custom_window` is %NULL, the default
* tooltip window will be used.
* @param custom_window a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_window(custom_window?: Gtk.Window | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:valign property.
* @param align the vertical alignment
*/
set_valign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand() for more detail.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_vexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the vexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_vexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @param set value for vexpand-set property
*/
set_vexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visibility state of `widget`. Note that setting this to
* %TRUE doesn’t mean the widget is actually viewable, see
* gtk_widget_get_visible().
*
* This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
* but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
* some condition.
* @param visible whether the widget should be shown or not
*/
set_visible(visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visual that should be used for by widget and its children for
* creating #GdkWindows. The visual must be on the same #GdkScreen as
* returned by gtk_widget_get_screen(), so handling the
* #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal is necessary.
*
* Setting a new `visual` will not cause `widget` to recreate its windows,
* so you should call this function before `widget` is realized.
* @param visual visual to be used or %NULL to unset a previous one
*/
set_visual(visual?: Gdk.Visual | null): void;
/**
* Sets a widget’s window. This function should only be used in a
* widget’s #GtkWidget::realize implementation. The %window passed is
* usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
* window of its parent widget as returned by
* gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
*
* Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
* by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
* widget’s init() function.
*
* Note that this function does not add any reference to `window`.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
set_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Sets a shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* transparent windows etc., see gdk_window_shape_combine_region()
* for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
show_all(): void;
/**
* Shows a widget. If the widget is an unmapped toplevel widget
* (i.e. a #GtkWindow that has not yet been shown), enter the main
* loop and wait for the window to actually be mapped. Be careful;
* because the main loop is running, anything can happen during
* this function.
*/
show_now(): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size,
* position and (optionally) baseline to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation and baseline may be adjusted. It
* will be forced to a 1x1 minimum size, and the
* adjust_size_allocation virtual and adjust_baseline_allocation
* methods on the child will be used to adjust the allocation and
* baseline. Standard adjustments include removing the widget's
* margins, and applying the widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and
* #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* If the child widget does not have a valign of %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE the
* baseline argument is ignored and -1 is used instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
* @param baseline The baseline of the child, or -1
*/
size_allocate_with_baseline(allocation: Gtk.Allocation, baseline: number): void;
/**
* This function is typically used when implementing a #GtkContainer
* subclass. Obtains the preferred size of a widget. The container
* uses this information to arrange its child widgets and decide what
* size allocations to give them with gtk_widget_size_allocate().
*
* You can also call this function from an application, with some
* caveats. Most notably, getting a size request requires the widget
* to be associated with a screen, because font information may be
* needed. Multihead-aware applications should keep this in mind.
*
* Also remember that the size request is not necessarily the size
* a widget will actually be allocated.
*/
size_request(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* This function attaches the widget’s #GtkStyle to the widget's
* #GdkWindow. It is a replacement for
*
*
* ```
* widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
* ```
*
*
* and should only ever be called in a derived widget’s “realize”
* implementation which does not chain up to its parent class'
* “realize” implementation, because one of the parent classes
* (finally #GtkWidget) would attach the style itself.
*/
style_attach(): void;
/**
* Gets the value of a style property of `widget`.
* @param property_name the name of a style property
* @param value location to return the property value
*/
style_get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
* This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget` to be
* emitted.
*/
thaw_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Translate coordinates relative to `src_widget’`s allocation to coordinates
* relative to `dest_widget’`s allocations. In order to perform this
* operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
* toplevel.
* @param dest_widget a #GtkWidget
* @param src_x X position relative to @src_widget
* @param src_y Y position relative to @src_widget
* @returns %FALSE if either widget was not realized, or there was no common ancestor. In this case, nothing is stored in *@dest_x and *@dest_y. Otherwise %TRUE.
*/
translate_coordinates(dest_widget: Gtk.Widget, src_x: number, src_y: number): [boolean, number, number];
/**
* Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of `widget`
* is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
* information.
*/
trigger_tooltip_query(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
unmap(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Should be called by implementations of the remove method
* on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
*/
unparent(): void;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
unrealize(): void;
/**
* Unregisters a #GdkWindow from the widget that was previously set up with
* gtk_widget_register_window(). You need to call this when the window is
* no longer used by the widget, such as when you destroy it.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
unregister_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns off flag
* values for the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
* See gtk_widget_set_state_flags().
* @param flags State flags to turn off
*/
unset_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_allocation(baseline: number): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_request(minimum_baseline: number, natural_baseline: number): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size allocation assigned
* by a #GtkContainer using gtk_widget_size_allocate(), into an actual
* size allocation to be used by the widget. adjust_size_allocation
* adjusts to a child widget’s actual allocation
* from what a parent container computed for the
* child. The adjusted allocation must be entirely within the original
* allocation. In any custom implementation, chain up to the default
* #GtkWidget implementation of this method, which applies the margin
* and alignment properties of #GtkWidget. Chain up
* before performing your own adjustments so your
* own adjustments remove more allocation after the #GtkWidget base
* class has already removed margin and alignment. The natural size
* passed in should be adjusted in the same way as the allocated size,
* which allows adjustments to perform alignments or other changes
* based on natural size.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
* @param allocated_pos
* @param allocated_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_allocation(
orientation: Gtk.Orientation,
minimum_size: number,
natural_size: number,
allocated_pos: number,
allocated_size: number,
): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size request from a widget's
* #GtkSizeRequestMode virtual method implementations into a size request to
* be used by parent containers in laying out the widget.
* adjust_size_request adjusts from a child widget's
* original request to what a parent container should
* use for layout. The `for_size` argument will be -1 if the request should
* not be for a particular size in the opposing orientation, i.e. if the
* request is not height-for-width or width-for-height. If `for_size` is
* greater than -1, it is the proposed allocation in the opposing
* orientation that we need the request for. Implementations of
* adjust_size_request should chain up to the default implementation,
* which applies #GtkWidget’s margin properties and imposes any values
* from gtk_widget_set_size_request(). Chaining up should be last,
* after your subclass adjusts the request, so
* #GtkWidget can apply constraints and add the margin properly.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_request(orientation: Gtk.Orientation, minimum_size: number, natural_size: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_press_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_release_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
*/
vfunc_can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
vfunc_child_notify(child_property: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the composited status of
* widgets screen changes. See gdk_screen_is_composited().
*/
vfunc_composited_changed(): void;
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this
* widget extra space when possible.
* @param hexpand_p
* @param vexpand_p
*/
vfunc_compute_expand(hexpand_p: boolean, vexpand_p: boolean): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the size, position or
* stacking of the widget’s window has changed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_configure_event(event: Gdk.EventConfigure): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a redirected window belonging to
* widget gets drawn into.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_damage_event(event: Gdk.EventExpose): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted if a user requests that a toplevel
* window is closed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_delete_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
vfunc_destroy(): void;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a #GdkWindow is destroyed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_destroy_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the text direction of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_direction
*/
vfunc_direction_changed(previous_direction: Gtk.TextDirection): void;
/**
* Seldomly overidden.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_child_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* started.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_begin(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag
* with the action %GDK_ACTION_MOVE is successfully completed.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_data_delete(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when the drop
* site requests the data which is dragged.
* @param context
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_get(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the
* dragged data has been received.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_received(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
x: number,
y: number,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the user drops the
* data onto the widget.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_drop(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* finished.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_end(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag has
* failed.
* @param context
* @param result
*/
vfunc_drag_failed(context: Gdk.DragContext, result: Gtk.DragResult): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves
* the widget.
* @param context
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_leave(context: Gdk.DragContext, time_: number): void;
/**
* signal emitted on the drop site when the user moves
* the cursor over the widget during a drag.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_motion(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.
* @param cr
*/
vfunc_draw(cr: cairo.Context): boolean;
/**
* Signal event will be emitted when the pointer
* enters the widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_enter_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
*/
vfunc_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
vfunc_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus enters the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_in_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_out_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
*/
vfunc_get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
*/
vfunc_get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Signal emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab
* on a window belonging to widget gets broken.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_grab_broken_event(event: Gdk.EventGrabBroken): boolean;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
vfunc_grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget becomes shadowed by a
* GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on another widget, or
* when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab being removed.
* @param was_grabbed
*/
vfunc_grab_notify(was_grabbed: boolean): void;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
vfunc_hide(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the anchored state of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_toplevel
*/
vfunc_hierarchy_changed(previous_toplevel: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a key is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_press_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a key is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_release_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
*/
vfunc_keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Will be emitted when the pointer leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_leave_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
vfunc_map(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is mapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_map_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
*/
vfunc_mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the pointer moves over
* the widget’s #GdkWindow.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_motion_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventMotion): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a change of focus is requested
* @param direction
*/
vfunc_move_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new parent has been set on a
* widget.
* @param previous_parent
*/
vfunc_parent_set(previous_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted whenever a widget should pop up a
* context menu.
*/
vfunc_popup_menu(): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a property on
* the widget’s window has been changed or deleted.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_property_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventProperty): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_in_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_out_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when “has-tooltip” is %TRUE and the
* hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering “above”
* widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.
* @param x
* @param y
* @param keyboard_tooltip
* @param tooltip
*/
vfunc_query_tooltip(x: number, y: number, keyboard_tooltip: boolean, tooltip: Gtk.Tooltip): boolean;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
vfunc_queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
vfunc_realize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the screen of a widget has
* changed.
* @param previous_screen
*/
vfunc_screen_changed(previous_screen: Gdk.Screen): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is
* pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_scroll_event(event: Gdk.EventScroll): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the the
* widget’s window has lost ownership of a selection.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_clear_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_get(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, info: number, time_: number): void;
vfunc_selection_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_received(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, time_: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when another
* client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget's
* window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_request_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
vfunc_show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
vfunc_show_all(): void;
vfunc_show_help(help_type: Gtk.WidgetHelpType): boolean;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
vfunc_size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state
* changes. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_state
*/
vfunc_state_changed(previous_state: Gtk.StateType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state changes,
* see gtk_widget_get_state_flags().
* @param previous_state_flags
*/
vfunc_state_flags_changed(previous_state_flags: Gtk.StateFlags): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new style has been set on a
* widget. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_style
*/
vfunc_style_set(previous_style: Gtk.Style): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the GtkStyleContext of a widget
* is changed.
*/
vfunc_style_updated(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a touch event happens
* @param event
*/
vfunc_touch_event(event: Gdk.EventTouch): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
vfunc_unmap(): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the widget’s window is
* unmapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_unmap_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
vfunc_unrealize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is
* obscured or unobscured.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_visibility_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventVisibility): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the state of the toplevel
* window associated to the widget changes.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_window_state_event(event: Gdk.EventWindowState): boolean;
}
namespace KeyRenderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Renderer.ConstructorProps {
object: Gck.Object;
}
}
/**
* An implementation of #GcrRenderer which renders keys.
*/
class KeyRenderer extends GObject.Object implements Renderer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
get object(): Gck.Object;
set object(val: Gck.Object);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](label?: string | null, attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): KeyRenderer;
// Methods
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the renderer.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the renderer. The attributes should represent
* either an RSA, DSA, or EC key in PKCS#11 style.
* @param attrs the attributes to display
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* The attributes to display.
*/
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
/**
* The label to display.
*/
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace KeyWidget {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Bin.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
}
}
/**
* A key widget and renderer
*
* A key widget can be used to display a RSA, DSA or EC key. The widget is
* normally in a collapsed state showing only details, but can be expanded by
* the user.
*
* Use [ctor`KeyWidget`.new] to create a new key widget. Only one key can be
* displayed. A key widget contains a [iface`Viewer]` internally and
* [class`KeyRenderer]` is used to render the key to the viewer. To show more
* than one key in a view, create the viewer and add renderers to it.
*/
class KeyWidget extends Gtk.Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): KeyWidget;
// Methods
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the widget.
* @returns The attributes, owned by the widget.
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the widget. The attributes should represent
* either an RSA, DSA or EC key in PKCS#11 style.
* @param attrs the attributes to display
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ListSelector {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.TreeView.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
}
}
/**
* A selector widget to select 1 or more certificates or keys from a list.
*
* Live search is available for quick filtering.
*/
class ListSelector extends Gtk.TreeView implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.Scrollable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
/**
* The collection which contains the objects to display in the selector.
*/
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](collection: Gcr.Collection): ListSelector;
// Conflicted with Gtk.TreeView.new
static ['new'](...args: never[]): any;
// Methods
/**
* Get the collection that this selector is displaying objects from.
* @returns The collection, owned by the selector.
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get a list of selected objects.
* @returns the list of selected objects, to be released with g_list_free()
*/
get_selected(): GObject.Object[];
/**
* Select certain objects in the selector.
* @param selected the list of objects to select
*/
set_selected(selected: GObject.Object[]): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* Horizontal #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
* shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set hadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Verical #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
* between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set vadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
* @returns %TRUE if @border has been set
*/
get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for horizontal scrolling.
* @returns horizontal #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for vertical scrolling.
* @returns vertical #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Sets the horizontal adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param hadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_hadjustment(hadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
* below the natural width.
* @param policy the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_hscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param vadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_vadjustment(vadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
* below the natural height.
* @param policy the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_vscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
*/
vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace PromptDialog {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Dialog.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gcr.Prompt.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
choice_visible: boolean;
choiceVisible: boolean;
confirm_visible: boolean;
confirmVisible: boolean;
password_visible: boolean;
passwordVisible: boolean;
warning_visible: boolean;
warningVisible: boolean;
}
}
/**
* A [iface`Gcr`.Prompt] implementation which shows a GTK dialog. The dialog
* will remain visible (but insensitive) between prompts. If the user cancels
* the dialog between prompts, then the dialog will be hidden.
*/
class PromptDialog extends Gtk.Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gcr.Prompt, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
/**
* Whether the choice check box is visible or not.
*/
get choice_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the choice check box is visible or not.
*/
get choiceVisible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password confirm entry is visible or not.
*/
get confirm_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password confirm entry is visible or not.
*/
get confirmVisible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password entry is visible or not.
*/
get password_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password entry is visible or not.
*/
get passwordVisible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the warning label is visible or not.
*/
get warning_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the warning label is visible or not.
*/
get warningVisible(): boolean;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* The string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
*
* In X11, this will be a stringified version of the XWindow handle; in
* Wayland this is the result of an export using the XDG foreign
* protocol.
*/
get caller_window(): string;
set caller_window(val: string);
/**
* The string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
*
* In X11, this will be a stringified version of the XWindow handle; in
* Wayland this is the result of an export using the XDG foreign
* protocol.
*/
get callerWindow(): string;
set callerWindow(val: string);
/**
* The label for the cancel button in the prompt.
*/
get cancel_label(): string;
set cancel_label(val: string);
/**
* The label for the cancel button in the prompt.
*/
get cancelLabel(): string;
set cancelLabel(val: string);
/**
* Whether the additional choice is chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice would have been setup using #GcrPrompt:choice-label.
*/
get choice_chosen(): boolean;
set choice_chosen(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the additional choice is chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice would have been setup using #GcrPrompt:choice-label.
*/
get choiceChosen(): boolean;
set choiceChosen(val: boolean);
/**
* The label for the additional choice.
*
* If this is a non-%NULL value then an additional boolean choice will be
* displayed by the prompt allowing the user to select or deselect it.
*
* If %NULL, then no additional choice is displayed.
*
* The initial value of the choice can be set with #GcrPrompt:choice-chosen.
*/
get choice_label(): string;
set choice_label(val: string);
/**
* The label for the additional choice.
*
* If this is a non-%NULL value then an additional boolean choice will be
* displayed by the prompt allowing the user to select or deselect it.
*
* If %NULL, then no additional choice is displayed.
*
* The initial value of the choice can be set with #GcrPrompt:choice-chosen.
*/
get choiceLabel(): string;
set choiceLabel(val: string);
/**
* The label for the continue button in the prompt.
*/
get continue_label(): string;
set continue_label(val: string);
/**
* The label for the continue button in the prompt.
*/
get continueLabel(): string;
set continueLabel(val: string);
/**
* The detailed description of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display this detailed description.
* The prompt message should contain relevant information.
*/
get description(): string;
set description(val: string);
/**
* The prompt message for the user.
*
* A prompt implementation should always display this message.
*/
get message(): string;
set message(val: string);
/**
* Whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
*/
get password_new(): boolean;
set password_new(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
*/
get passwordNew(): boolean;
set passwordNew(val: boolean);
/**
* Indication of the password strength.
*
* Prompts will return a zero value if the password is empty, and a value
* greater than zero if the password has any characters.
*
* This is only valid after a successful prompt for a password.
*/
get password_strength(): number;
/**
* Indication of the password strength.
*
* Prompts will return a zero value if the password is empty, and a value
* greater than zero if the password has any characters.
*
* This is only valid after a successful prompt for a password.
*/
get passwordStrength(): number;
/**
* The title of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display the prompt title. The
* #GcrPrompt:message should contain relevant information.
*/
get title(): string;
set title(val: string);
/**
* A prompt warning displayed on the prompt, or %NULL for no warning.
*
* This is a warning like "The password is incorrect." usually displayed to the
* user about a previous 'unsuccessful' prompt.
*/
get warning(): string;
set warning(val: string);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Closes the prompt so that in can no longer be used to prompt. The various
* prompt methods will return results as if the user dismissed the prompt.
*
* The prompt may also be closed by the implementor of the prompt object.
*
* This emits the [signal`Prompt:`:prompt-close] signal on the prompt object.
*/
close(): void;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this function to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the reply from the prompt
*/
confirm(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
*/
confirm_async(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Promise;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
confirm_async(cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback | null): void;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
confirm_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback | null,
): Promise | void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for confirmation.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
* @returns the reply from the prompt
*/
confirm_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this function to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter
* and will run a main loop similar to a `gtk_dialog_run()`. The application
* will remain responsive but care must be taken to handle reentrancy issues.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the reply from the prompt
*/
confirm_run(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Get the string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the string handle of the window.
*/
get_caller_window(): string;
/**
* Get the label for the cancel button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL reply
* from the prompt.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the label
*/
get_cancel_label(): string;
/**
* Get whether the additional choice was chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice would have been setup using
* gcr_prompt_set_choice_label().
* @returns whether chosen
*/
get_choice_chosen(): boolean;
/**
* Get the label for the additional choice.
*
* This will be %NULL if no additional choice is being displayed.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the additional choice or %NULL
*/
get_choice_label(): string;
/**
* Get the label for the continue button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE reply
* from the prompt.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the label
*/
get_continue_label(): string;
/**
* Get the detailed description of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display this detailed description.
* The prompt message should contain relevant information.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the detailed description of the prompt
*/
get_description(): string;
/**
* Gets the prompt message for the user.
*
* A prompt implementation should always display this message.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the detailed description of the prompt
*/
get_message(): string;
/**
* Get whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
* @returns whether in new password mode or not
*/
get_password_new(): boolean;
/**
* Get indication of the password strength.
*
* Prompts will return a zero value if the password is empty, and a value
* greater than zero if the password has any characters.
*
* This is only valid after a successful prompt for a password.
* @returns zero if the password is empty, greater than zero if not
*/
get_password_strength(): number;
/**
* Gets the title of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display the prompt title. The
* prompt message should contain relevant information.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the prompt title.
*/
get_title(): string;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Window.get_title
get_title(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Get a prompt warning displayed on the prompt.
*
* This is a warning like "The password is incorrect." usually displayed to the
* user about a previous 'unsuccessful' prompt.
*
* If this string is %NULL then no warning is displayed.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the prompt warning, or %NULL if no warning
*/
get_warning(): string;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the password owned by the prompt, or %NULL
*/
password(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): string;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
*/
password_async(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Promise;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
password_async(cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback | null): void;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
password_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback | null,
): Promise | void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for a password.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
* @returns the password owned by the prompt, or %NULL
*/
password_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): string;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter
* and will run a main loop similar to a gtk_dialog_run(). The application
* will remain responsive but care must be taken to handle reentrancy issues.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the password owned by the prompt, or %NULL
*/
password_run(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): string;
/**
* Reset the contents and properties of the prompt.
*/
reset(): void;
/**
* Set the string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
* @param window_id the window id
*/
set_caller_window(window_id: string): void;
/**
* Set the label for the continue button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL reply
* from the prompt.
* @param cancel_label the label
*/
set_cancel_label(cancel_label: string): void;
/**
* Set whether the additional choice is chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice should be set up using gcr_prompt_set_choice_label().
* @param chosen whether chosen
*/
set_choice_chosen(chosen: boolean): void;
/**
* Set the label for the additional choice.
*
* If this is a non-%NULL value then an additional boolean choice will be
* displayed by the prompt allowing the user to select or deselect it.
*
* The initial value of the choice can be set with the
* gcr_prompt_set_choice_label() method.
*
* If this is %NULL, then no additional choice is being displayed.
* @param choice_label the additional choice or %NULL
*/
set_choice_label(choice_label?: string | null): void;
/**
* Set the label for the continue button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE reply
* from the prompt.
* @param continue_label the label
*/
set_continue_label(continue_label: string): void;
/**
* Set the detailed description of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display this detailed description.
* Use gcr_prompt_set_message() to set a general message containing relevant
* information.
* @param description the detailed description
*/
set_description(description: string): void;
/**
* Sets the prompt message for the user.
*
* A prompt implementation should always display this message.
* @param message the prompt message
*/
set_message(message: string): void;
/**
* Set whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
* @param new_password whether in new password mode or not
*/
set_password_new(new_password: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the title of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display the prompt title. The
* prompt message should contain relevant information.
* @param title the prompt title
*/
set_title(title: string): void;
/**
* Set a prompt warning displayed on the prompt.
*
* This is a warning like "The password is incorrect." usually displayed to the
* user about a previous 'unsuccessful' prompt.
*
* If this string is %NULL then no warning is displayed.
* @param warning the warning or %NULL
*/
set_warning(warning?: string | null): void;
/**
* close a prompt
*/
vfunc_prompt_close(): void;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
vfunc_prompt_confirm_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback | null,
): void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for confirmation.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
*/
vfunc_prompt_confirm_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
vfunc_prompt_password_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback | null,
): void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for a password.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
*/
vfunc_prompt_password_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): string;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace SecureEntryBuffer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends Gtk.EntryBuffer.ConstructorProps {}
}
/**
* A [class`Gtk`.EntryBuffer] that uses non-pageable memory.
*
* It's good practice to try to keep passwords or sensitive secrets out of
* pageable memory whenever possible, so that they don't get written to disk.
*
* A [class`SecureEntryBuffer]` is a [class`Gtk`.EntryBuffer] to be used with
* [class`Gtk`.Entry] which uses non-pageable memory to store a password placed
* in the entry. In order to make any sense at all, the entry must have it's
* visibility turned off, and just be displaying place holder characters for
* the text. That is, a password style entry.
*
* Use [ctor`Gtk`.Entry.new_with_buffer] or [method`Gtk`.Entry.set_buffer] to set this buffer
* on an entry.
*/
class SecureEntryBuffer extends Gtk.EntryBuffer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](): SecureEntryBuffer;
}
namespace TreeSelector {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.TreeView.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
columns: any;
}
}
/**
* A tree selector can be used to select certificates or keys. It allows
* the user to select multiple objects from a tree.
*/
class TreeSelector extends Gtk.TreeView implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.Scrollable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
/**
* The collection which contains the objects to display in the selector.
*/
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* The columns to use to display the objects.
*/
get columns(): any;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
// Methods
/**
* Get the collection that this selector is displaying objects from.
* @returns the collection, owned by the selector
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get a list of selected objects.
* @returns the list of selected objects, to be released with g_list_free()
*/
get_selected(): GObject.Object[];
/**
* Select certain objects in the selector.
* @param selected the list of objects to select
*/
set_selected(selected: GObject.Object[]): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* Horizontal #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
* shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set hadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Verical #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
* between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set vadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
* @returns %TRUE if @border has been set
*/
get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for horizontal scrolling.
* @returns horizontal #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for vertical scrolling.
* @returns vertical #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Sets the horizontal adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param hadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_hadjustment(hadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
* below the natural width.
* @param policy the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_hscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param vadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_vadjustment(vadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
* below the natural height.
* @param policy the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_vscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
*/
vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace UnlockOptionsWidget {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Bin.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
choice: string;
ttl: number;
}
}
/**
* This widget displays a set of unlock options for the user to select.
*
* The user can choose between keeping caching the unlock indefinitely, or for
* a given amount of time.
*
* Each option has a different name, for example #GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS. These
* names are used together with the various functions like
* [method`UnlockOptionsWidget`.get_choice].
*/
class UnlockOptionsWidget extends Gtk.Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
get choice(): string;
set choice(val: string);
get ttl(): number;
set ttl(val: number);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](): UnlockOptionsWidget;
// Methods
/**
* Get the currently selected option, like %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @returns The currently selected option name.
*/
get_choice(): string;
/**
* Get the label for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
* @returns The current label for the option.
*/
get_label(option: string): string;
/**
* Get the sensitivity state for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
* @returns Whether the option is sensitive or not.
*/
get_sensitive(option: string): boolean;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_sensitive
get_sensitive(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Get the timeout setting set for unlock options that have a timeout.
* This will also return a valid value if the currently selected option
* does not have a timeout.
* @returns The unlock timeout in seconds.
*/
get_ttl(): number;
/**
* Set the currently selected option. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
*/
set_choice(option: string): void;
/**
* Set the label for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
* @param text The new label
*/
set_label(option: string, text: string): void;
/**
* Set the sensitivity state for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS. The reason will be displayed as a tooltip.
* @param option The option name
* @param sensitive The sensitivity state.
* @param reason A user displayable string which contains the reason for the sensitivity.
*/
set_sensitive(option: string, sensitive: boolean, reason: string): void;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_sensitive
set_sensitive(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Set the current setting for the timeout. This can be set even when the
* currently selected option does not have a timeout.
* @param ttl The timeout to set, in seconds
*/
set_ttl(ttl: number): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ViewerWidget {
// Signal callback interfaces
interface Added {
(renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed): void;
}
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Box.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Orientable.ConstructorProps {
display_name: string;
displayName: string;
parser: Gcr.Parser;
}
}
/**
* A viewer widget which can display certificates and keys that are
* located in files.
*/
class ViewerWidget extends Gtk.Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.Orientable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Properties
/**
* Display name for data being displayed. This is automatically
* calculated from a loaded file, or can be explicitly set.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
*/
get display_name(): string;
set display_name(val: string);
/**
* Display name for data being displayed. This is automatically
* calculated from a loaded file, or can be explicitly set.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
*/
get displayName(): string;
set displayName(val: string);
/**
* The parser used to parse loaded data into viewable items.
*/
get parser(): Gcr.Parser;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](): ViewerWidget;
// Signals
connect(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
connect_after(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
emit(id: string, ...args: any[]): void;
connect(signal: 'added', callback: (_source: this, renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed) => void): number;
connect_after(
signal: 'added',
callback: (_source: this, renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed) => void,
): number;
emit(signal: 'added', renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed): void;
// Methods
/**
* Clear the error displayed on the viewer widget.
*/
clear_error(): void;
/**
* Get the display name for data being displayed. This is automatically
* calculated from a loaded file, or can be explicitly set.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
* @returns the display name
*/
get_display_name(): string;
/**
* Get the parser used to parse loaded data into viewable items.
* @returns the parser
*/
get_parser(): Gcr.Parser;
/**
* Get the viewer used to display the viewable items.
* @returns the viewer
*/
get_viewer(): Viewer;
/**
* Parse and load some data to be displayed into the viewer widgets. The data
* may contain multiple parseable items if the format can contain multiple
* items.
* @param display_name label for the loaded data
* @param data data to load
*/
load_bytes(display_name: string | null, data: GLib.Bytes | Uint8Array): void;
/**
* Parse and load some data to be displayed into the viewer widgets. The data
* may contain multiple parseable items if the format can contain multiple
* items.
*
* This function will copy the data. Use [method`ViewerWidget`.load_bytes] to avoid
* copying the data.
* @param display_name label for the loaded data
* @param data data to load
*/
load_data(display_name: string | null, data: Uint8Array | string): void;
/**
* Display contents of a file in the viewer widget. Multiple files can
* be loaded.
* @param file a file to load
*/
load_file(file: Gio.File): void;
/**
* Set the display name for data being displayed. Once explicitly
* set it will no longer be calculated automatically by loading data.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
* @param display_name the display name
*/
set_display_name(display_name: string): void;
/**
* Show an error on the viewer widget. This is displayed on a info bar near
* the edge of the widget.
* @param message descriptive error message
* @param error detailed error
*/
show_error(message: string, error?: GLib.Error | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* The orientation of the orientable.
*/
get orientation(): Gtk.Orientation;
set orientation(val: Gtk.Orientation);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
* @returns the orientation of the @orientable.
*/
get_orientation(): Gtk.Orientation;
/**
* Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
* @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
*/
set_orientation(orientation: Gtk.Orientation | null): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
type CertificateRendererClass = typeof CertificateRenderer;
abstract class CertificateRendererPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type CertificateWidgetClass = typeof CertificateWidget;
abstract class CertificateWidgetPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type CollectionModelClass = typeof CollectionModel;
abstract class CollectionModelPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ComboSelectorClass = typeof ComboSelector;
abstract class ComboSelectorPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type FailureRendererClass = typeof FailureRenderer;
abstract class FailureRendererPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ImportButtonClass = typeof ImportButton;
abstract class ImportButtonPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type KeyRendererClass = typeof KeyRenderer;
abstract class KeyRendererPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type KeyWidgetClass = typeof KeyWidget;
abstract class KeyWidgetPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ListSelectorClass = typeof ListSelector;
abstract class ListSelectorPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type PromptDialogClass = typeof PromptDialog;
abstract class PromptDialogPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type RendererIface = typeof Renderer;
type SecureEntryBufferClass = typeof SecureEntryBuffer;
abstract class SecureEntryBufferPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type TreeSelectorClass = typeof TreeSelector;
abstract class TreeSelectorPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type UnlockOptionsWidgetClass = typeof UnlockOptionsWidget;
abstract class UnlockOptionsWidgetPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ViewerIface = typeof Viewer;
type ViewerWidgetClass = typeof ViewerWidget;
namespace Renderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
label: string;
}
}
export interface RendererNamespace {
$gtype: GObject.GType;
prototype: Renderer;
/**
* Create and initialize a renderer for the given attributes and label. These
* renderers should have been preregistered via gcr_renderer_register().
* @param label The label for the renderer
* @param attrs The attributes to render
*/
create(label: string | null, attrs: Gck.Attributes): Renderer | null;
/**
* Register a renderer to be created when matching attributes are passed to
* gcr_renderer_create().
* @param renderer_type The renderer class type
* @param attrs The attributes to match
*/
register(renderer_type: GObject.GType, attrs: Gck.Attributes): void;
/**
* Register all the well known renderers for certificates and keys known to the
* Gcr library.
*/
register_well_known(): void;
}
interface Renderer extends GObject.Object {
// Properties
/**
* The attributes to display.
*/
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
/**
* The label to display.
*/
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Methods
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Get the PKCS#11 attributes, if any, set for this renderer to display.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Set the PKCS#11 attributes for this renderer to display.
* @param attrs attributes to set
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
// Virtual methods
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
}
export const Renderer: RendererNamespace & {
new (): Renderer; // This allows `obj instanceof Renderer`
};
namespace Viewer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends Gtk.Widget.ConstructorProps {}
}
export interface ViewerNamespace {
$gtype: GObject.GType;
prototype: Viewer;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a view
* of multiple renderers.
*/
['new'](): Viewer;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a scrolled view
* of multiple renderers.
*/
new_scrolled(): Viewer;
}
interface Viewer extends Gtk.Widget {
// Methods
/**
* Add a renderer to this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to add
*/
add_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
/**
* Get the number of renderers present in the viewer.
* @returns The number of renderers.
*/
count_renderers(): number;
/**
* Get a pointer to the renderer at the given index. It is an error to request
* an index that is out of bounds.
* @param index_ The index of the renderer to get
* @returns the render, owned by the viewer
*/
get_renderer(index_: number): Renderer;
/**
* Insert a renderer at a specific point in the viewer
* @param renderer the renderer to insert
* @param before the renderer to insert before
*/
insert_renderer(renderer: Renderer, before?: Renderer | null): void;
/**
* Remove a renderer from this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to remove
*/
remove_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
// Virtual methods
/**
* Add a renderer to this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to add
*/
vfunc_add_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
/**
* Get the number of renderers present in the viewer.
*/
vfunc_count_renderers(): number;
/**
* Get a pointer to the renderer at the given index. It is an error to request
* an index that is out of bounds.
* @param index_ The index of the renderer to get
*/
vfunc_get_renderer(index_: number): Renderer;
/**
* Insert a renderer at a specific point in the viewer
* @param renderer the renderer to insert
* @param before the renderer to insert before
*/
vfunc_insert_renderer(renderer: Renderer, before?: Renderer | null): void;
/**
* Remove a renderer from this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to remove
*/
vfunc_remove_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
}
export const Viewer: ViewerNamespace & {
new (): Viewer; // This allows `obj instanceof Viewer`
};
/**
* Name of the imported GIR library
* `see` https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gjs/-/blob/master/gi/ns.cpp#L188
*/
const __name__: string;
/**
* Version of the imported GIR library
* `see` https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gjs/-/blob/master/gi/ns.cpp#L189
*/
const __version__: string;
}
export default GcrUi;
}
declare module 'gi://GcrUi' {
import GcrUi3 from 'gi://GcrUi?version=3';
export default GcrUi3;
}
// END